JP2017029698A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in player's desire to play a game.SOLUTION: When a determination result of determination means becomes a specific determination result, a privilege game is executed. Further, variable ball entry means permitting ball entry in execution of a privilege game is provided, and a specific area, and variation means capable of alternately varying an advantageous state in which balls can pass through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which balls cannot pass through the specific area are provided within the variable ball entry means. In this case, based on satisfaction of predetermined conditions, a specific game state in which a privilege game can be executed for a plurality of times may be set such that balls reach the variation means for a plurality of times within one operation period from when the variation means is varied to one state to when the variation means is varied to the one state next.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 96

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a special game (for example, a small hit game) is executed if the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result, and the ball passes through a specific area during the special game, A gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege (for example, a winning game) is given has been proposed.

JP 2007-301008 A

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a bonus game is executed, the ball does not necessarily pass through the specific area. Therefore, when a bonus game in which the ball does not pass through the specific area is executed a plurality of times, There was a risk that the willingness of the game would be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in player's willingness to play.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes: a discriminating unit that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition; a display unit that displays identification information based on a discrimination result by the discriminating unit; After the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means for a predetermined period, the dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information based on the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. And when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, the ball enters the ball from a closed state where the ball is difficult to enter. A variable entry means that can be changed to an open state, a specific area provided in the variable entry means, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given based on the passage of the ball through the specific area. Privilege granting means and Variable means capable of alternately changing an advantageous state in which a sphere can pass through the specific area and an unfavorable state in which the passage of the sphere is more difficult than the advantageous state, and the variable means include the advantageous state or A variable control means for variably controlling the variable means, with a period from the time when the state is changed to one of the disadvantageous states to the time when the state is changed to the one state being one operation period; and a predetermined condition Specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within the one operation period, It is what has.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the entry information is obtained based on the entry means capable of entering the ball and the entry of the ball into the entry means. And a storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the predetermined condition is established when a determination result by the determination unit is a predetermined determination result other than the specific determination result. Is.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the specific gaming state setting means is a dynamic display period in which identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period setting means can set a special dynamic display period which is a dynamic display period shorter than normal when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It has special dynamic display period setting means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein when the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least before the special dynamic display period is set, the entry information is stored in the storage means. Has an entry assisting state setting means for setting an entry assisting state that is easily memorized.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. After the identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined time by the dynamic display means, the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the stop-displayed identification information is identification information based on a specific determination result, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. The variable means that can be changed alternately between an advantageous state in which a sphere can easily pass through a specific region or an unfavorable state in which a sphere is difficult to pass is changed to either an advantageous state or an unfavorable state by a variable control means. Until the next change to one of the states is variably controlled as one operation period. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the specific game state setting means sets a specific game state in which the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period.

  As a result, it becomes possible to execute the privilege game a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period of the variable means, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's gaming motivation. There is an effect that can be.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, based on the entrance of the ball into the entrance means, entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and a plurality of the acquired entrance information is stored until at least a determination condition is satisfied by the storage means. .

  Thereby, a plurality of dynamic displays can be executed sequentially. Therefore, since the situation where the dynamic display is interrupted within one operation period can be suppressed, there is an effect that the possibility of executing the privilege game a plurality of times can be increased.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the predetermined condition is established when the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the specific determination result.

  Thereby, there is an effect that various games can be provided to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, the dynamic display period setting unit sets a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special dynamic display period setting unit sets the dynamic display period shorter than normal. A special dynamic display period, which is a period, is set.

  As a result, by executing the dynamic display a plurality of times within one operation period of the variable means, the privilege game is executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed in a period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, the following effect is produced. In other words, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least before the special dynamic display period is set, the entry assist state in which entry information is easily stored in the storage unit is set by the entry assist state setting unit.

  This makes it easy to set the special dynamic display period in a state where a plurality of pieces of entry information are stored in the storage means, and thus there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation where the specific gaming state is interrupted in the middle.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the front view which expanded a partial field of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of a 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a front view which shows the inside of a 1st ball entering apparatus. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the 1st random number table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the 1st jackpot type selection table typically, (c) is the 1st It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the small hit classification selection table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table for special figure 1, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table for special figure 2; (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for jackpots, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for losing. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for small hits. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario a, and (c) is a jackpot scenario b. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of this. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit scenario table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the small hit scenario a typically, (c) is small It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the hit scenario b typically. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device, (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game specification storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V-gate scenario, and (c) is a precursor effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the selection table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous production type selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous production variation pattern selection table, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous production | presentation fluctuation pattern selection table (additional prize-winning). (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting medium effect pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the warning effect fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. (A) is a timing chart showing a flow in which a jackpot game is executed via a small hit game, and (b) is a timing showing a flow in which a jackpot game is executed based on a special symbol lottery. It is a chart. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the timing chart shown about the flow of continuous production and operation control of various devices. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is the timing chart shown about the flow of continuous jackpot production and operation control of various devices. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation execution determination process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting start setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the door time process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of V passage performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the V gate drive control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot ending control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting ending control processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the V gate command reception process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hits start production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the precursor fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous production | presentation fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous production type selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the V passage possible fluctuation | variation determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the V counter update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the jackpot opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the last round command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the jackpot interval command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the jackpot ending-related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) showed the small hit opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing the small hitting ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the door passing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is. It is the flowchart which showed V passage command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed SW related command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the second embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st small hitting type selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the content of the type selection table for special figure 1 in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the classification selection table for special figures 2 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for jackpots in 2nd Embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a deviation variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table for small hits in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit scenario table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the small hit scenario a in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit scenario b in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of the special symbol game and the operation of the V gate 650d when the normal variation pattern in the second embodiment is selected, and (b) It is the timing chart which showed typically the timing of the special symbol game and the operation of V gate 650d when special variation pattern in 2 execution is selected. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the counter subtraction process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting ending control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process 2 at the time of V passage performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the 1st random number table 3 in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st small hitting type selection table in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the content of the type selection table for special figure 1 in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the classification selection table for special figures 2 in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment. It is the front view which showed typically the internal structure of the winning unit of the pachinko machine in the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the top view which showed typically the winning unit of the state which the 2nd opening-and-closing member has closed in the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the modification of 3rd Embodiment. 2 is a plan view schematically showing a winning unit in a state where a second opening / closing member is open in FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between the opening-and-closing drive and ball flow of the 3rd variable prize-winning apparatus in the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 is a front view of the interior of the second variable winning device 650, FIG. 5 is a front view of the interior of the first winning device 64, and FIG. 6 is a back view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  The inner frame 12 includes a first entrance device 64 having a number of nails, a winning entrance 63, a first entrance 64a and a second entrance A 64b (see FIG. 5), and a second entrance B 640b. A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having the second ball winning device 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650 and the like is detachably mounted from the front side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. It has become.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a sphere is formed in a substantially box shape projecting forward to open the upper surface, and award balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination.

  Further, the front frame 14 has a frame left button 22a provided on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) and a frame right button 22b provided on the right side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) are arranged at an interval (about 500 millimeters) that is difficult to operate with one hand. Needs to release both hands from the operation handle 51 and use both hands.

  The frame buttons 22 (the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b) change, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or the effect of super reach. It is operated by the player when making changes. Although details will be described later, an effect of simultaneously operating both the frame buttons 22 (the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b) is also executed.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, variation effects and reach effects, etc. that are performed in association with a so-called starting winning opening (start winning prize) such as a first entrance 64a, a second entrance A 64b, and a second entrance B 640b described later. The various productions are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “street stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) that receives the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Is called. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails (only a part is shown), and a windmill (not shown). , Rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first entering apparatus 64 having a first entrance 64a and a second entrance A64b, a second entrance apparatus 640 having a second entrance B 640b, a first The variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). It is attached. A first winning device 64 having a general winning port 63, a first incoming port 64a and a second incoming port A 64b, a second incoming device 640 having a second incoming port B 640b, a first variable winning device 65, a first 2 The variable winning device 650 and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Therefore, for example, by providing a decorative movable accessory that moves according to the game on the rear surface side of the base plate 60, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the movement of the movable accessory, so the range is limited. The game area being used can be used three-dimensionally, and various effects can be provided to the player.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first entrance 64a, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the sphere enters the second entrance (the second entrance A64b or When entering the second entrance B640b), the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate by LED whether the pachinko machine 10 is short-running or normal, by a lighting state, whether it is changing, by a lighting state, Indicates whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a jackpot, or an out-of-band symbol by lighting status, indicates the type of jackpot or jackpot by lighting status, and indicates the number of held balls by lighting status In addition, the number of rounds and the error that is a big hit are displayed on the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 are notified with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors. It is configured.

  In this embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance (the second entrance A64b or the second entrance B640b) is suspended for a maximum of 4 times. However, the maximum number of holding times is not limited to four, and may be set to three times or less (for example, two times) or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a lottery of the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed, and the ball enters the second entrance A64b or the second entrance. When entering the entrance B 640b (hereinafter referred to as the second entrance 64b, 640b), the lottery of the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. In addition, when the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary symbol start opening) 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn.

  In the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol) performed for entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 640b, the special symbol is a big hit or Whether or not a win is made is determined, and if the special symbol is determined to be a big win, the type of the big win is also determined.

  When the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is successful is a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state (a jackpot game). Here, when the jackpot game is executed, after the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) (after the opening period elapses), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65, which is normally closed, is set for a predetermined period. It is opened (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won), and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Then, after opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 a predetermined number of times, the jackpot game ends when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (ending period elapses).

  It is configured that 15 balls are paid out to the player as a winning ball when one ball is won in the first variable winning device. In addition, a period (opening period) from when the jackpot game is executed until the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, or the specific door 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). ) The period from the repetition until the jackpot game ends (ending period), and the period during which the specific door 65f is closed during the opening operation of the specific door 65f that is repeatedly executed (interval period) are set as appropriate. do it.

  During the jackpot game, a large number of balls (about 100 (10 rounds per round × 10 rounds)) are awarded at the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65, so a larger number of balls (about 1000 balls than usual) (100 pieces × 10 shots)) is paid out.

  As will be described in detail later, in the special symbol jackpot, one of the jackpot types is determined from two types of jackpot A and jackpot B (see FIG. 10B), and the number of times depending on the jackpot type Only the specific door 65f is opened. In addition, after the special game state ends, the short-time game state is given to the player a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times).

  Here, the short-time gaming state (short-time medium) means that the winning probability of the first symbol (special symbol) and the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not different from the normal state, but the first symbol (special symbol) and the second symbol The variation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) is shortened, and the time for opening the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entering device 640 that is opened when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is hit is extended. (For example, 1 second (opening 0.5 seconds twice)). That is, in the short-time game state, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second entrance B640b than in the normal game state.

  When it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type is also determined. That is, when the special symbol is a small hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific gaming state (small winning game), and the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined period (for example, Until 1.5 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  As a result, a ball can enter the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Although the details will be described later, a V discharge flow path 650e3 is provided inside the second variable prize winning device 650 described above (see FIG. 4), and it is detected that the sphere has passed through the V discharge flow path 650e3. When the switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) detects (hereinafter referred to as passing through a specific area), a jackpot game is awarded.

  As will be described in detail later, when winning a small bonus of a special symbol, one of three types of “small bonus A”, “small bonus B”, and “small bonus C” is referred with reference to the first small bonus type selection table 202c. Is selected (see FIG. 11A). Then, a small hit game is executed based on the selected small hit type. In addition, in each of the jackpot types, “jackpot C” or “jackpot D” is set as a jackpot type that can be given as a result of the jackpot game.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 wins a big hit by a special symbol lottery game (so-called one-type game) and a special symbol lottery, and the second variable winning device 650 by the small bonus game. It has a game (so-called 1-type 2-type mixing machine) equipped with a game (so-called 2-type game) aiming for a big hit by passing a ball that has won a prize to a specific area.

  By having such a game, the player can aim for a big hit at a plurality of occasions, so that it becomes possible to alleviate the tiredness of the game.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery executed for the passage of the ball to the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, whether or not the normal symbol is correct is determined. When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance device 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the second entrance B640b is reached. The ball is ready to enter. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance B640b, and as a result, it becomes easier to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device (not shown), and a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 180 seconds) is given. After the elapse, the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Is done.

  As described above, the special symbol jackpot type includes “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B” given by the special symbol lottery and the detection switch (specific area) 650e5 provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3. There are four types of “big hit C” and “big hit D” given by detecting a sphere. As shown in FIG. 10 (b), each jackpot type is set so that the operation content of the specific door (attacker) 65f in the jackpot game and the short-time game state after the jackpot game end. Specifically, the “jackpot A” is a jackpot (2R (round) jackpot) in which the specific door (attacker) 65f of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened twice, and a short-time gaming state (special) after the jackpot game ends. The period of time until the special symbol fluctuates eight times is set (a state in which the variation time of the symbol and the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is lengthened) (the number of time reductions is eight). “Big Bonus B” is a big jackpot (5R (round) jackpot) in which the specific door (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened five times. After the jackpot game is over, the short-time gaming state has eight special symbols. The period until it fluctuates is set (number of time reductions 8 times). In any of the jackpots, when one ball is won in the first winning device 65 or when the opening time of the first winning device 65 has passed 30 seconds, the end condition of one round is set. When the end condition for one round is satisfied, the specific door 65f is closed and one round is ended.

  As described above, in the jackpot game in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot and the presence / absence of the short-time game state after the jackpot game are changed according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot.

  In addition, the period of “short-time gaming state” may be changed according to the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type becomes “jackpot A”, the special symbol changes three times after the “jackpot A” ends. When the time period is set to the short-time gaming state and the “big hit B” is reached, the period from the end of the “big hit B” until the special symbol changes six times may be set to the short-time gaming state.

  Furthermore, the “short-time gaming state” period granted after the jackpot may be changed according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, when “bonus A” is won in the “normal gaming state”, The period from the end of “A” until the special symbol fluctuates three times is set to the short-time gaming state, and if “winning jackpot A” is won in the “short-time gaming state”, the special symbol fluctuates eight times after the “big hit A” ends. This period may be a short-time gaming state. As a result, even if the same type of jackpot (for example, jackpot A) is won, the benefit (short-time gaming state) that is advantageous to the player according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or short-time gaming state) at the time of winning The contents of can be made different.

  As described above, a bonus is given to the player by enabling the player to provide various benefits corresponding to the winning jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition to the sense of expectation, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the content of the privilege to be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the jackpot game in the present embodiment, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is kept open until the end condition of the round is satisfied during one round, but the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is within one round. The specific door 65f may be configured to open and close a plurality of times. For example, in the “big hit A”, among the 2R (round) big wins, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is first set in the first round. After opening for 1.5 seconds (first opening) and closing the specific door 65f once, it may be opened for 28.5 seconds (second opening).

  By constructing in this way, it will be possible to open for a long time after making it seem that it is a jackpot that can not secure a ball even though it won a jackpot with a special design, and to improve the interest of the game Can do. In addition, for example, when the special symbol lottery is not determined to be a big win (when it is determined to have come off), the small door that the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 opens for a short period (for example, 1.5 seconds). As a result of a lottery with a special symbol, the player won the jackpot A at the timing when the specific door 65f of the first variable prize-winning device 65 was opened for 1.5 seconds (first opening). There is an effect that it is not possible to grasp whether or not the winner is won, and it is possible to entertain the game by focusing attention on the subsequent operation of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65.

  Even when a configuration in which the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened a plurality of times within one round is used, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 within one round is used for the end condition of the round. For example, when the total number of seconds released in one round reaches 30 seconds and the total number of game balls won in one round is 10 It is preferable that the round timing is used as a round end condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to unify the round end condition, and thus it is possible to share a part of the control processing during the big hit. .

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, as a bonus after the jackpot game, the short-time gaming state is given according to the jackpot type, but even if another bonus is given as a privilege given after the jackpot game For example, a high probability state in which the big hit probability or the small hit probability of a special symbol is set higher than the normal gaming state may be given for a predetermined period. In this case, the predetermined period includes a period until winning the next jackpot, a period until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), and a transition to the normal gaming state with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). The period until the lottery is performed and the lottery is won can be considered. In addition, as other benefits, a privilege that increases the probability of winning a normal symbol over the normal gaming state, and the opening pattern of each winning device that is executed in the big hit game or the small hit game is changed to an open pattern advantageous to the player. Benefits can be considered.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is set with a predetermined probability (397/399) as a special symbol lottery result (see FIG. 10A). As described above, there are three types of small hits, “small hit A”, “small hit B”, and “small hit C”. As a result of lottery of special symbols, Based on this, a specific gaming state (small hit game) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), specifically, “small hit A” is a small value that executes the operation of opening the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 once (1.5 seconds). When the detection switch 650e5 detects that the ball has passed the V discharge flow path 650e3 during the small hit game (passes through a specific area), the big hit type (V pass) given after the small hit game ends Jackpot D is set as the jackpot of time). “Small Bonus B” is a small hit where the operation of opening the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 is executed three times (0.1 seconds × 3 times). Is set. “Small hit C” is a small hit that performs the operation of opening the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 three times (0.1 seconds × 3 times). Is set.

  That is, since “small hit A” opens the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 for a longer period than other small winnings, the second variable winning device 650 is compared with other small winnings. It is a small hit that a game ball can easily enter in the second specific prize opening 650a provided in.

  Here, the configuration of the lower right region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view in which the lower right region III of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is enlarged and a cover body that covers the front surface of the second variable winning device 650 is removed. The cover body that covers the front surface of the second variable prize-winning device 650 is composed of a transmissive member whose inside is visible.

  In addition, you may comprise the location which covers the ball path | route in the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 650 at least among the cover bodies with a half mirror. With this configuration, when a decoration lamp (light emitting means) provided in the decoration section 650g described later emits light, the player can visually recognize the ball path in the second variable prize-winning device 650. When the lamp is not emitting light (turned off), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball path in the second variable winning device 650.

  Therefore, for example, in the case where the gaming state is a gaming state in which a game ball is awarded to the second variable prize-winning device 650 (small winning gaming state), by lighting a decoration lamp provided in the decoration unit 650g, Thus, it is possible to easily recognize that the gaming state is aimed at the second variable winning device 650, and the player can use the second variable winning device in a game state other than a game state or a small hit game state. Since it is possible to make the ball path in the 650 invisible (difficult), a fraudulent act (for example, a guide member that guides the ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 to the V discharge flow path 650e3 that is the specific area) By deforming (V gate) 650d, grasping the action of passing the game ball to the V discharge flow path 650e3 and the operation timing of the guide member (V gate) 650d, In law timing varying special symbols act) there is an effect that it is possible to hardly take place. Details of the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. The second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 used in the pachinko machine 10 is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by a door 650f configured by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board side, and in the ball Can be changed to difficult closed state. In the closed state, the opening of the second specific prize opening 650a is completely covered by the door 650f, and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the door 650f in the lower left direction as viewed from the front of the game board 13.

  Further, in the open state, the second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened when the door 650f is retracted in the internal direction of the game board 13. In addition, an inclined surface for rolling the game ball toward the door 650f is formed on the upstream side of the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 (right side of the game board 13 as viewed from the front) with respect to the door 650f.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the main flow of the sphere flowing down the right region of the game board 13 will be described. The ball flowing down the right region of the game board 13 passes through a passage path having a passage width equivalent to one game ball formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2), and the lower right of the game board 13 Reach the area. The ball that has reached the lower right region flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 that is released during the jackpot game, and when the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the second variable winning device described above is then performed. Flow down to device 650.

  The ball rolling on the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 in the lower left direction as viewed from the front of the game board flows down toward the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small hit game. When the door 650f is closed, it rolls on the door 650f in the closed state, passes through a through gate (ordinary symbol start port) 67 for starting normal symbol fluctuation, and flows down to the second ball entry device 640. To do. Then, the ball that reaches the bottom of the game board 13 passes through the out port 71 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  By configuring in this way, the small hit game state, the short-time game state, and the big hit game state, which are advantageous for the player, are all executed in a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right region of the game board 13. Control for notifying the player of the change of the game method accompanying the change of the game state (left-handed notification) and reducing the time and effort for the player to operate the operation handle 51 in accordance with the change of the game state Can play games easily.

  In addition, by providing the first variable winning device 65 on the uppermost stream side in the lower right region, it is possible to efficiently win game balls that have been hit right during the big hit game. Furthermore, by providing the second ball entry device 640 on the downstream side of the normal symbol start port 67, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 enters the second ball entrance B640b of the second ball input device 640. It becomes possible to make a ball, and the fired ball can be used efficiently in a game. Also, the first variable winning device that can give a player a greater privilege than entering the second entering device 640 by providing the second entering device 640 on the downstream side of the lower right region. 65 and the second variable pitching device 650 won't interfere with the driving of the electric accessory 640a of the second pitching device 640, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable during the game. can do.

  Next, the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable prize-winning device 650 disposed on the game board 13 and shows an open state in which the door 650f is opened to allow a ball to enter. ing.

  First, an outline of the configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. When the small winning game is started, the second variable winning device 650 is variably controlled to an open state in which the door 650f can win a ball.

  Here, the small hit game will be described. A small hit game is a game state that transitions after the change of the special symbol is stopped (the symbol is fixed) when the special symbol's success / failure determination result is a determination result corresponding to the small bonus, and a predetermined period (opening period) This is a game in which the door 650f of the second variable prize-winning device 650 is opened after the passage, and a ball can enter the second variable prize-winning device 650. Although detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of small hit types (small hit A to small hit C), and a mode in which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened ( (Open pattern) and the jackpot type that can be given after the small hit game ends.

  Returning to FIG. The ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 is configured to pass through either a V discharge flow path 650e3 or a normal discharge path 650e4, which will be described later, and be discharged out of the gaming machine. The ball is passed through the detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area in the V discharge channel 650e3, so that the execution of the big hit game is started after the end of the small hit game.

  Therefore, when the small hit game is started, the player launches the ball so as to aim at the second variable prize winning device 650, and the ball awarded to the second variable prize winning device 650 passes the specific area (detection switch 650e5). Thus, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the flow of the ball, and there is an effect that the game motivation can be increased.

  Returning to FIG. 4A, each configuration will be described. The second variable prize-winning device 650 is provided with a horizontally long second specific prize-winning port 650a at the substantially central portion of the upper surface, and the second specific prize-winning port 650a is in an open state in which a ball can win (easy). , A door 650f is provided for changing the ball to a closed state where it is impossible (difficult) to win.

  The door 650f is configured by a shutter mechanism that can be moved in and out from the game board 13 side. When the second specific prize opening 650a shown in FIG. 4A is opened, the door 650f is retracted to the inside of the game board 13, In the closed state of the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball is configured to completely cover the second specific winning opening 650a having an opening width (50 mm) at which a plurality of balls can simultaneously win. The door 650f is configured such that balls can roll in a row on the upper surface of the door 650f in a state of protruding so as to completely cover the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, a plurality of balls rolling on the door 650f at the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a is changed from the closed state to the open state can be simultaneously awarded to the second variable winning device 650.

  The balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 are aligned in a line by an unillustrated alignment path, and then pass through a passage detection switch 650a1 that detects winning in the second variable winning device 650. Specifically, the alignment path in which the width direction of the second specific prize opening 650a (the left-right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 4A) is the downward direction is arranged at a lower position for receiving the ball won from the second specific prize opening 650a. To do. The alignment path has a passage width (about 15 millimeters) through which one sphere can pass, and is configured to flow down the sphere toward the lower right direction (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 4A). ing.

  With this configuration, in a state where a plurality of balls are rolling on the door 650f, when the second specific winning opening 650a is in an open state, the plurality of balls rolling on the door 650f are aligned. It will fall along the flow direction of the road, and it becomes possible to arrange the winning balls efficiently.

  An intermediate partition member 650f3 is provided in the second variable winning device 650, and a ball flows down the upper side of the intermediate partition member 650f3, and the second flow down the lower side of the intermediate partition member 650f3. A flow path 650e2 is formed. The first flow path 650e1 is a flow path that communicates with the normal discharge flow path 650e4, and the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e4 and is collected at a collection port (not shown) to the outside of the gaming machine. And discharged. The normal discharge flow path 650e4 is provided with a passage detection switch 650e6 that detects a sphere flowing down the flow path, and is configured to be able to calculate the number of spheres flowing down the normal discharge flow path 650e4.

  On the other hand, the second flow path 650e2 is a flow path provided with a stopper (ball stop member) 650c and a V gate 650d, which will be described later, and the sphere can flow down to either the normal discharge flow path 650e4 or the V discharge flow path 650e3. It is formed as a flow path. The V discharge flow path 650e3 is provided with a passage detection switch 650e5 that detects a ball flowing down the flow path, and the big hit game is played after the small hit game ends based on the passage detection switch 650e5 detecting the ball. It is configured to be executed. Note that the sphere that has flowed down the V discharge flow path 650e3 is collected at a collection port (not shown) and discharged outside the gaming machine.

  The flow of the sphere to the first flow path 650e1 or the second flow path 650e2 described above is switched by the flow path switching member 650b. The flow path switching member 650b is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion 650b1 provided at one end thereof, and is rotated downward to a contact position where it comes into contact with the regulation piece 650b2 by being pushed down by a dropped ball. It is configured as follows. When the flow path switching member 650b rotates to the contact position, the flow path is switched so that the sphere that has pushed down the flow path switching member 650b flows down to the second flow path 650e2.

  Further, the flow path switching member 650b is provided with a leaf spring (not shown) as an urging member for urging the shaft support portion 650b1 in an upward direction. 4 (a) is configured to be able to return to the position indicated by a solid line.

  Further, the flow path switching member 650b is configured such that a tip portion 650b3 thereof can be refracted in one direction by a refracting portion 650b4. Specifically, the flow path switching member 650b is configured to be refractable with the lower surface side as an axis, and the distal end portion 650b3 is configured to bend downward with respect to the flow path switching member 650b. As a result, when the flow path switching member 650b rotates (returns) from the contact position to the initial position, even if there is an obstacle in the range in which the distal end portion 650b3 rotates, the distal end portion 650e3 is refracted to thereby refract the initial position. It is configured to be able to rotate (return).

  Next, the stopper (ball stop member) 650c provided in the second flow path 650e2 will be described. A stopper (ball stop member) 650c provided in the second flow path 650e2 is configured to be movable between a ball stop position that stops the flow of the sphere and a release position that allows the flow of the sphere. The details of the control for moving the stopper (ball stop member) 650c will be described later with reference to FIG. 25. However, when the small hit game is executed, the stopper 650c is moved to the ball stop position, and thereafter, for a predetermined time (this embodiment). Then, it is controlled to move to the release position after 4.5 seconds).

  In the state where the stopper (ball stop member) 650c described above is located at the ball stop position, the ball is retained by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c as shown in FIG. The staying sphere comes into contact with the tip 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b that has returned to the initial position, and the flow path switching member 650b is prevented from rotating (rotating downward) to the contact position. . In this state, when a ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 passes through the passage detection switch 650a1 and falls on the flow path switching member 650b, the ball flows down the first flow path described above.

  In the state where the sphere is retained by the stopper 650c, when the flow path switching member 650b moves upward, the tip end portion 650b3 cushions the retained sphere. As described above, the flow path switching member 650b is configured such that the tip end portion 650b3 can be bent, and thus rotates (returns) to the initial position in a state where the tip end portion 650b3 is refracted downward.

  The flow path switching member 650b rotated (returned) to the initial position is pushed down again by the succeeding ball that has won the prize, but the tip 650b3 comes into contact with the ball staying at the staying position. Therefore, the downward movement is restricted, and the tip portion 650b3 refracted by the refracting portion 650b4 returns to the normal state (the state indicated by the solid line in FIG. 4A).

  Next, the V gate (guidance member) 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 will be described. The V gate 650d includes a guidance state (guidance position) in which the sphere can pass through a passage detection switch (specific region) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3, and a sphere in the V discharge flow path 650e3. It is configured to be alternately changed to a restricted state (restricted position) that is a state (position) in which passage through the switch 650e5 is difficult to pass, and is always performed while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. A certain operation is repeatedly executed. When the V gate 650d in the pachinko machine 10 is attached to the game board 13, an inclination is provided so that the upper surface of the V gate flows down to the lower left side (lower left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 4A). The rolling surface 650f1 on the downstream side of the stopper 650c is configured to be covered. This is because when the ball flows down at the timing when the V gate 650d is in the restricted state, the ball flows down smoothly into the second flow path 650e2, and when the ball flows down at the timing when the V gate 650d is in the guiding state. This is because the sphere is surely guided to the V discharge channel 650e3. Detailed description will be given later.

  Next, with reference to FIG.4 (b), the positional relationship of each structure provided in the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 650 is demonstrated in detail. The upstream end side of the intermediate partition member 650f3 is provided at a position where it communicates with the downstream end side of the flow path switching member 650b located at the initial position. The downstream end side has a sphere that flows down to the normal discharge flow path 650e4. In order to surely flow down, it is provided up to a position protruding to the left side of the partition wall 650f2 provided to partition the V discharge channel 650e3 and the normal discharge channel 650e4.

  More specifically, a gap between the upstream end portion of the intermediate partition member 650f3 and the flow path switching member 650b positioned at the initial position (such as a gap that does not hinder the rotation operation of the flow path switching member 650b) (for example, ), And the upstream end portion of the intermediate partition member 650f3 has a predetermined level difference (upper end with respect to the upper surface downstream end portion of the flow path switching member 650b located at the initial position). For example, it is provided so that a level difference less than half a sphere) may occur. This is because when the succeeding sphere that won the second winning device 650 falls on the flow path switching member 650b, even if the flow path switching member 650b slightly moves in the vertical direction, the sphere is smoothly moved to the second flow path. This is to make it flow down. With this configuration, even if a slight error occurs in the attachment position of the stopper 650c and the flow path switching member 650b, it is possible to prevent the ball flow from being affected. Further, even if the installation state of the pachinko machine 10 has some errors with respect to the horizontal, it is possible to prevent the ball flow from being affected.

  Next, the downstream configuration of the intermediate partition member 650f3 will be described. The downstream end portion of the intermediate partition member 650f3 is formed in an arc shape downward, and the height position of the downstream end facing downward (a4 in FIG. 4B) and the upper end of the partition wall 650f2 The distance from the height position (a2 in FIG. 4B) is less than one sphere. With this configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which a sphere flowing down the first flow path 650e1 flows down to the V discharge flow path 650e3.

  Desirably, the distance between the height position of the upper end of the partition wall 650f2 (a2 in FIG. 4B) and the height position of the downstream end of the intermediate partition member 650f3 (a4 in FIG. 4B) is set to the half of the sphere. It should be less than the number of pieces. With this configuration, when the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 and the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 merge, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 has a higher position. Therefore, it is possible to preferentially flow down the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2. Accordingly, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 stays by colliding with the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1, and in this state, the V gate 650d is in an induced state and the V discharge flow path 650e3 is moved to the sphere. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which an unexpected game such as spilling down occurs.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the V gate 650d will be described. The V gate 650d is configured such that the height position (a1 in FIG. 4B) on one end side of the upper surface is higher than the height position (a2 in FIG. 4B) on the other end side that contacts the partition wall 650f2. The other end side is configured to be substantially the same height as the upper end portion of the partition wall 650f2. With this configuration, the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the V gate 650d can smoothly flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e4.

  The upper surface of the V gate 650d only needs to have a downward slope in the lower left direction, and the height of the other end may be higher than the upper end of the partition wall 650f2. In the present embodiment, the upper surface of the partition wall 650f2 is flat, but may be inclined in the same direction as the upper surface of the V gate 650d. By forming in this way, it becomes possible to flow down the sphere more smoothly to the normal discharge flow path 650e4. Further, a gap may be provided between the V gate 650d and the partition wall 650f2 so as not to hinder the rolling of the sphere.

  Next, the rolling surface 650f1 is formed in an arc shape toward the V discharge channel 650e3, and the height position (a3 in FIG. 4B) on the upstream end side of the rolling surface 650f1 is a partition wall 650f2. It is comprised so that it may become lower. With this configuration, when the V gate 650d is in the guiding state (the V discharge flow path 650e3 is open), the sphere that has flowed down jumps over the partition wall 650f2 and flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e4. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the rolling surface 650f1 is formed in an arcuate shape, but may be any shape as long as the sphere rolling on the rolling surface 650f flows down to the V discharge channel 650e3. An inclined linear shape may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the V gate 650d and the rolling surface 650f1 are configured to substantially contact each other, but a space may be provided between the V gate 650d and the rolling surface 650f1. With this configuration, the shape of the V gate 650d can be made simple, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 4A to 4B, the flow of balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 4A is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable prize-winning device 650 disposed on the game board 13, and shows an open state in which the door 650f is opened to allow a ball to enter. FIG. FIG. 4B is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable prize-winning device 650 disposed on the game board 13, and the door 650 f is closed so that the ball cannot be entered (difficult). It is a figure which shows a closed state.

  A ball that has started a small hit game and has won the second variable winning device 650 first flows down an alignment path (not shown), and its passage is detected by a passage detection switch 650a1. Thereafter, the first winning ball pushes down the flow path switching member 650b, flows down to the second flow path 650e2, and stays by the stopper 650c positioned at the ball stop position (see FIG. 4A). When a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the small hit game, the stopper 650c moves to the release position, and the ball retained by the stopper 650c flows down the second flow path 650e2 toward the V gate 650d. (See FIG. 4B). When the ball flows down the V gate 650d, the V discharge channel 650e3 flows down when the V gate 650d is in the guiding state, and the V gate 650d rolls over the V gate 650d when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state. 650e4 flows down.

  Next, the flow of the subsequent ball that won the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, when the subsequent ball flows down in the second variable winning device 650, the ball has already stayed at the stay position, and the flow path switching member 650b has moved (returned) to the initial position. It is. In this state, the winning ball rolls on the flow path switching member 650b and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 while flowing down the upper surface of the intermediate partition member 650f3 (see FIG. 4A).

  In addition, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 is detected by the passage detection switch 650a1, the ball that has flowed down the V discharge channel 650e3 is detected by the passage detection switch 650e5, and the ball that has flowed down the normal discharge region 650e4. Is detected by the passage detection switch 650e6. Thus, by making it possible to detect the total number of winning balls (total number of balls detected by the passage detection switch 650a1) and the total number of discharged balls (total number of balls detected by the passage detection switches 650e5 and 650e6). Since it is possible to monitor whether or not the winning ball is discharged within a predetermined time, for example, a clogged ball occurring in the second variable winning device 650 or a ball intentionally in the second variable winning device 650. It is possible to easily find fraudulent acts that leave behind.

  The following detection sensors may be provided in the second variable winning device 650. For example, a switch that can detect that the flow path switching member 650b is located at the initial position or the contact position may be provided. By providing such a switch, it is possible to easily detect a failure of the flow path switching member 650b. Further, a switch that can detect that the flow path switching member 650b is located at the contact position continuously for a predetermined time may be provided. By providing such a switch, it is possible to easily grasp the state where the flow path switching member 650b is not moved (returned) to the initial position for some reason.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as a result of the special symbol game, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened when the small winning game given when winning the small winning is started. The second specific prize opening 650a is in an open state. When a ball wins the second variable winning device 650 in the open state, one ball is retained by the stopper 650c as a ball that can pass over the V gate 650d. Subsequent balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 flow down the first flow path 650e1 and pass through the normal discharge path 650e4. When the predetermined time elapses, the door 650f is closed and the second specific winning opening is closed, so that no new winning is generated in the second variable winning device 650. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the stopper 650c moves to the release position, and the staying sphere flows down toward the V gate 650d. When the sphere reaches the V gate 650d, if the V gate 650d is in an inductive state (open state), it passes through a passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3 and a big hit is given. Is done. On the other hand, if the V gate 650d is in the restricted state (closed state), it rolls on the V gate 650d and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 while flowing down the second flow path 650e2.

  The sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 and the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 merge at the merge position 650e7. It is configured as follows. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls win the second variable winning device 650, all the balls can be processed smoothly.

  Details of the opening timing of the door 650f, the operation timing of the stopper 650c, and the operation timing of the V gate 650d of the second variable winning device 650 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the configuration of the first ball entry device 64 will be described. FIGS. 5A and 5B are diagrams schematically showing the internal structure of the first ball entry device 64. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front surface side, and the cover body is made of a member that can be seen through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  At the upper part of the first entrance device 64, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter, and a transmission type entrance sensor 64c that makes it possible to detect that the game ball has passed therethrough is disposed. Has been. The game balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first entry opening 64a and the second entry opening A64b arranged below the distribution entry member 900.

  The sorting member 900 receives the entered game ball in the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When a game ball is received in the housing portion 900a, the sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball as viewed from the front (see FIG. 5A), and the game ball is first inserted. Guide to mouth 64a. Here, each of the sorting members 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees left and right, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c.

  In the base body provided on the back side of the first ball entry device 64, the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 is disposed at a position on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have opposite polarities. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side.

  The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet is located at a position where the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is located directly above (on the center line of the space where the game balls at the passage opening can be inserted by about 1 ball). The position 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the rebounding may stop at a position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly above. It will be maintained in the position rotated to either the right or left.

  As a result, when the distribution member 900 is located at the position where the magnet 900b is located on the center line of the passage opening (upward position), the refraction of the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 causes the distribution member 900 to be left or right. The storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900c turn toward the side (the upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the first ball entry device 64. Therefore, the game balls are appropriately distributed to either the first entrance 64a or the second entrance A64b by receiving the entered game balls in any of the storage portions 900a and 900c. be able to.

  In addition, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, for example, after the housing portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 15 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first entrance 64a. It is possible to prevent the sorting member 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thus, after guiding the game ball to the first entrance 64a, the storage portion 900b is directed upward, and the game ball that has entered the first entrance device 64 is received by the storage portion 900b. Thus, the distribution member 900 rotates about 30 degrees to the right by the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the second entrance A64b. As described above, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the game balls entering the first entrance device 64 to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance A64b. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls equally to the first entrance 64a and the second entrance A64b for winning, and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as a result of winning in the first entrance 64a, which will be described later). The first lottery game) and the lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the second lottery game) resulting from winning at the second entrance A64b can be executed efficiently.

  The second entrance B 640b provided in the second entrance device 640 is an entrance where the lottery of the second special symbol will be started when a game ball enters as in the second entrance A64b. . The second pitching device 640 has an electric accessory 640a which is a variable means (see FIG. 2), and according to the operation of the electric accessory 640a, an open state in which the ball is easy to win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win It is comprised so that it may become. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when a winning game is awarded by a normal symbol lottery. In the second special symbol, there are four holding balls including the second entrance A64b and the second entrance B640b.

  In addition, only a game ball that has passed through the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter the passage opening of the first entry device 64 (size that allows one game ball to pass). Only a game ball that has passed through the right side can enter the ball opening B640b.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The center frame 86 is provided with decorative movable accessories 400, 500, and 600 that can be moved in response to a variation display of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81, an effect display during the winning game, and the like. Has been. The decorative movable accessory 400, 500, 600 can provide a lively effect to the player by allowing the movable movable object 400, 500, or 600 to move or causing the built-in LED to emit light.

  In addition, each decoration movable accessory 400,500,600 is movable so that the display area P (refer FIG. 2) of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may each be covered.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. The 3rd symbol displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 kinds of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by adding numbers “0” to “9” on the pattern.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the variable display is performed so that a plurality of main symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, “341” or the like).

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, all numbers from “0” to “9” are used regardless of the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) to be given. May be available. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds of jackpots in a predetermined period (special fluctuation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won. Also, when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, a chance chance composed of “341” breaks is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance chance is one type of “341”, but it is not limited to this, and other chance eyes may be formed.

  Variation display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, and only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are respectively stored, the variation of the special symbol is set in the order of winning. In this embodiment, the first special symbol hold memory (maximum 4) and the second special symbol hold memory (maximum 4) are changed in the order in which they are stored (winning order). However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the second special symbol is set to be preferentially changed and the second special symbol has a reserved memory, the reserved memory status of the first special symbol Regardless, the second special symbol may be preferentially changed. Moreover, you may make it the structure which is variably displayed simultaneously with a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11B, but the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol (special diagram 1). The ratio at which the small hit type A which is the small hit type is selected is set high. Here, since the first entrance device 64 alternately wins the first entrance 64a and the second entrance A64b, the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is alternated. To be executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a bias from being biased to one prize opening, and to prevent the player's damage from becoming excessive. It is configured so as to be able to suppress the problem that the performance becomes extremely high. In addition, since the frequency of the so-called over-winning, which exceeds the upper limit of the number of reserved balls due to being biased to one of the winning holes, can be reduced, even though a ball has entered the winning hole. The player's dissatisfaction due to not winning a prize can be reduced, and the game player's sales will not increase due to the turnover rate of the game being worsened by stopping the ball injection every time the player reaches the upper limit of the number of balls held. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the short-time game state is given, if a right-handed game is performed aiming at the right area of the game board 13 in order to enter the second entrance B640b, it is advantageous for the player. Since the transition to the special symbol variation game mainly including the special symbol (special symbol 2) is made, the short-time gaming state can be provided as a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

  The detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 26, but the display screen (P) of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the upper side is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower side other than that is a sub display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows are displayed, and the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so that they appear in descending order in the left symbol row, and the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row and the right symbol row.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle portion of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row in each game. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the active line when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot. In addition, if a combination of small hit symbols on the active line (in this embodiment, a combination where the main symbol is “341”) is arranged, a small hit animation is displayed as the small hit.

  As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plurality of small hit types (small hit A to small hit C). Among these small hit types, small hits (for example, small hit A) and right that are advantageous for the player by executing a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right area of the game board 13 during the small hit game. A small hit (for example, a small hit C) is set so that the player is not advantageous even if the hit game is executed. In the small hit video described above, a guidance display for guiding a game method advantageous to the player according to the type of the small hit (for example, a right hit game corresponding to the small hit A is displayed for guiding a right-handed game). It is included.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls that is the number of spheres (reserved spheres) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64a or the second entrances 64b and 640b. This is the area to be displayed. Specifically, in the small area Ds1, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in a manner in which the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be identified.

  In the small area Ds2, a changing symbol which is the same as the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol being changed is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether the special symbol that is currently variably displayed is Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2 by viewing the changing symbol. In addition, even when an effect that changes the mode of the reserved symbol (so-called holding notice effect) is adopted as an effect that suggests that the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol may be a big hit, the special symbol that is currently changing It is possible to easily grasp the presence or absence of the hold notice effect.

  Therefore, it is possible to easily associate the hold notice effect performed in advance with the special symbol variation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player is interested in the effect. In addition, as the above-mentioned reserved notice effect, for example, an effect that changes the color of the reserved symbol (white → blue → red), an effect that changes the background effect of the reserved symbol (implied by the size of the flame), and the reserved symbol For example, an effect that allows the player to determine the likelihood of a big hit, such as an effect that makes characters appear.

  In the small area Ds3, a game description for the special symbol game in which the variable display is performed (“explanation indicating that the button is pressed”) and contents for informing the current game state are displayed. In addition, the guidance display of the gaming method during the small hit game displayed in the small hit video displayed in the main display area Dm is displayed in any of the various display areas (Ds1 to Ds3) constituting the sub display area Ds. You may make it display. By doing in this way, the powerful display corresponding to the small hit game in the main display area Dm and the decoration display congratulating that the small hit game is won are executed, and in a different area from the main display area Dm. Since the guidance display for guiding the game method can be executed in a certain sub display area Ds, the guidance display is obstructive and the production display becomes difficult to see, or the decoration display is too conspicuous and the guidance display is overlooked. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

  In this embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are configured to be distinguished from each other. However, the reserved symbol is changed to the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the reserved ball cannot be distinguished (difficult).

  Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. It is transmitted from the control device 110 to the sub-control device only in one direction. On the other hand, the payout control device 111 is configured to be capable of transmitting and receiving data in both directions.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes various switches including a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a detection of a ball, and a sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor) for detecting an illegal game. 208, a door solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650, a ball stop solenoid 650c2 for driving the stopper 650c in the second variable winning device 650, and the second variable winning device 650. Various solenoids 209, such as a V gate solenoid 650d2 for driving the V gate and a specific door solenoid 65f2 for opening and closing the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65, are connected. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

  Further, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115 is connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 outputs signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erase output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the signal SG2.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. The rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 is transmitted to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the operation of the lower plate unit 15 or the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. Can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuation pattern effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 (the frame left button 22a, the frame right button 22b), and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the stage to be changed or the contents of the effect at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Since details of the display control device 114 are known, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply circuit (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, and display setting on the second symbol display device. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first hit type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the outage stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type of the special symbol The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 50). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, each of which includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each area, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 640b, Each value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is normally used. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 50).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 64b, 640b. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 64b, 640b.

  Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, If the random number is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first per random number counter C1, there is one random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “0” is stored in the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 10A). Yes. In this way, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values is 400, the probability that the special symbol jackpot will be “1/400”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10B). As shown in FIG. 10 (b), in the case of a special symbol jackpot, in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 49” is “jackpot A”. Become. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a kind of special symbol detachment (other than jackpot), there is provided a small hit where the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. In the first per random number counter C1, there are 398 random numbers that are small hits of special symbols, and the random numbers “1 to 398” are stored in the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 10A). Stored. In this way, since the total number of random numbers is 400 when the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability that the special symbol will be a small hit is “398/400”.

  Further, the value of the small hit type counter C4 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 398, and the value of the small hit type counter C4 and the ROM 202 are provided. The small hitting type is determined based on the first small hitting type selection table 202c (see FIG. 10C). In the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 for the second special symbol (special figure 2). (See FIG. 10C). And the range of the random value in which each small hit type is set is changed in accordance with each table (see FIGS. 11A to 11B). This is because, as described above, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more advantageous than the first special symbol (special figure 1) to increase the ratio at which the small hit A that is advantageous to the player is selected. is there. The contents of the small hit game corresponding to each small hit type will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to increment one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Leaching other than front and back" (for example, a range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. And three stop (effect) patterns of “complete out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a. It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 64b, 640b.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a normal game state and a short-time game state, and the range of random values set for each outage stop type is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  For example, in the short-time gaming state, a table for a high probability time with a wide range of random values ranging from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. It becomes easy to select “off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the case of a normal game, a random value range corresponding to the stop type of “completely off” is required in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 640b. A table with a low probability of 0 to 79 is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely off”. Further, in the normal gaming state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear” is easily selected. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, since it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 640b, and the third symbol display. The variable display by the device 81 is easily performed continuously. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98-99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.5 seconds has been executed, if the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds and the symbol is confirmed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.5 seconds + 0.5 seconds) It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 50) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202e (FIG. 11 (c), FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (b)) that stores a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1. FIG. 13) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9A).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 398 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 398). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. And is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit.

  There are 200 random numbers that can be used as a normal symbol, and the range is “0 to 199”. These random values are normally stored in a random number table per symbol. In this way, since the total number of random numbers in the normal symbol is 399, the total number of random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol is 200, so the probability of hitting the normal symbol is approximately “½”.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 180 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 199”, it is determined that it is a hit, and after the variable display is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is lit and displayed. The second entrance B640b is opened for "0.2 seconds x once". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance B 640b is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time game state (short-time), the probability of winning the normal symbol is “1/2”, which is the same as the normal game state, but the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Is set to 1 second. Further, when the normal symbol is won, the opening pattern is set so that the second entrance B640b is opened “0.5 seconds × 2 times”. Thus, in the short-time game state, the game ball is configured to be easier to enter the second entrance B640b than in the normal game state.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 398), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 50).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 selects a special symbol lottery or a variation pattern and sets a normal symbol lottery or a variation pattern according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed.

  In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 50), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 49) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 9A, the ROM 202 includes a first hit random number table 202a, a first big hit type selection table 202b, a first small hit type selection table 202c, and a second hit random number table 202d. A pattern selection table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202f, and a jackpot scenario table 202g are provided at least.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the first per random number table 202a, a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol is also set. Details of the first random number table 202a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values of the first jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type. The detailed contents of the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The first small hit type selection table 202c is a data table in which the determination value of the small hit type counter C5 for determining the small hit type is set for each small hit type. This first small hit type selection table 202c has different data depending on whether the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is won or not and the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is won. It is configured to refer to the table to determine the type of allowance. When a small hit is made in the special figure 1, the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 is selected. Refer to the use type selection table 202c2 (FIG. 10C). The detailed contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second hit random number table 202d is a data table in which the hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. For example, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 stored in the second hit random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 199. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit in the normal gaming state, the stop symbol is lit and displayed after the fluctuation display for a predetermined time (180 seconds) ends, and the second entrance B640b. The electric accessory 640a attached to is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state (short time medium), the value of the second per-random number counter C3 determined to be a normal symbol hit does not change, but the variation time when determined to be a normal symbol hit is set to 1 second. After the change display is completed, the stop symbol is lit up and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance B640b is opened “0.5 seconds × twice”.

  Note that the value of the second per-random number counter C3 that is determined to be a normal symbol win may be changed between the normal game state and the short-time game state (short-time medium).

  The variation pattern selection table 202e is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a dedicated jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 12 (a)) when the success / failure determination result is a jackpot. When the determination result is out of play and in the normal gaming state, a dedicated variation pattern selection table 202e2 for losing (see FIG. 12B) and when the determination result is small hit, the dedicated small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (See FIG. 13).

  The jackpot scenario table 202f is a data table used to determine an opening scenario for opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the selected jackpot type are defined. Has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, in the jackpot scenario table 202f, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the dedicated jackpot scenario a202f1 (see FIG. 14B) and the jackpot type is jackpot B. A special jackpot scenario b202f2 (see FIG. 14C) and a special jackpot scenario c (not shown) when the jackpot type is jackpot C or D.

  In this jackpot scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p (see FIG. 9B) that is counted when the jackpot scenario is set. The opening / closing control of the specific door 65f is executed based on the contents.

  The small hit scenario table 202g is a data table used for determining an open scenario for opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the selected small hit type. Is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), the small hit scenario table 202g includes a dedicated small hit scenario a202g1 (FIG. 15 (d)) when the small hit type is small hit A, and the small hit type is In the case of the small hit B or C, it is configured by a dedicated small hit scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 15C).

  In the small hit scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q (see FIG. 9B) that is executed when the small hit scenario is set. Based on the contents of the scenario, the opening / closing control of the door 650f is executed, and the operation control of the stopper 650c provided in the second variable winning device 650 is executed. Further, in the process of determining whether or not the passage of the sphere into the second specific winning port 650a and the V discharge flow path 650e3 is normal, the range in which the passage of the sphere is allowed is also based on the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q. It is prescribed.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 9B, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A special symbol 2 held ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol held ball number counter 203f, an hour / hour counter 203h, a counter buffer 203i, a variation execution flag 203j, a variation order storage area 203k, and a V flag 203m. , An open counter 203n, a close counter 203o, a big hit scenario counter 203p, a small hit scenario counter 203q, a special figure 2B effective period flag 203r, an effective period measuring counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first entrance 64a (first special symbol), and has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), In each of these areas, values of a first random number counter C1, a first big hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a first small hit type counter C5 are respectively stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64a, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, when lottery of special symbol 1 is performed in main controller 110, each value of each counter C1-C3 and C5 stored in the reserved first area of special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 that are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins (starts winning) at the first entrance 64a and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired in accordance with the starting win, those values are included. A winning information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to receive the winning information in the RAM 233. Store in the storage area 223a.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second special symbol (second entrance A64b, second entrance B640b). The only difference is that the first special symbol (first entrance 64a) is changed to the second special symbol (second entrance A64b, second entrance B640b). Omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the order of winning. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, other Shift processing is performed in which the winning data stored in the reserved area is packed into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable symbol display (the third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64a (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Every time a ball enters the first entrance 64a and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is reached. 1 is added (see S704 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a new variation display of the special symbol 1 is executed (see S207 in FIG. 35).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the first special symbol (first entrance 64a) is the second special symbol (second entrance A64b, 2 is different from the second entrance B640b), and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display held in the special symbol 2) is held. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the ball number command (see S208 and S211 in FIG. 35, S705 in FIG. 40, and S808 in FIG. 41). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs main control by a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls of the variable display held in the device 110 itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has a maximum number of held balls (the number of waiting times) for the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to once. The normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary symbol start port) 67 and the number of retained balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S1104 in FIG. 44). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1009 in FIG. 43).

  When the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1106 in FIG. 44). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c. (S1103 in FIG. 44: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the hour / short game state (time / short), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the hour / short game state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal game state) of the normal symbol. The initial value of the hour / middle counter 203h is set to zero, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the main controller 110 when the jackpot ending ends (that is, the jackpot end timing). Specifically, when the jackpot type is “big jackpot A”, “big jackpot B”, and “big jackpot D”, 8 is set, and when “big jackpot C”, 0 is set. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is completed until the value of the hour / minute counter 203h becomes 0 (S222 in FIG. 35).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, if the lottery result is a win, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is 0. A release pattern of 5 seconds × 2 times is set (S1017 in FIG. 43), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1 second (S1018 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, the normal symbol change time is set to 180 seconds as in the case where the normal symbol lottery result is other than winning (S1017 in FIG. 43).

  The counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value as described above.

  The change execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is changed or the second special symbol is changed. The variable execution flag 203j indicates the first special symbol if the reserved data stored in the first storage area among the storage areas of the variable order storage area 203k described later is reserved data based on the first special symbol, If the hold data is based on the special symbol, the second special symbol is set as a special symbol to be subjected to variable execution. This flag is an area that is backed up even when power is interrupted, and the first special symbol is preferentially set in the initial state where the RAM is cleared.

  The change order storage area 203k is an area for storing a winning order for each piece of held data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this change order storage area 203k, eight storage areas are set, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. Note that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

  The V flag 203m is a flag for storing that it has detected that a ball has passed through the passage detection switch 640e5 which is a specific area of the second variable winning device 650, and the value of the V flag 203m is set at the end of the small hit. Based on this, a jackpot is granted. The V flag 203m is set to a jackpot type based on the jackpot type in the V passing process (S1306, S1309 in FIG. 46), and is referred to in the jackpot ending control process (S2107 in FIG. 54), and then turned off. (S2108 in FIG. 54).

  The open counter 203n is a counter used for driving control of the V gate 650d, which is a guide member provided in the second variable winning device 650, and the V gate solenoid 650e2 is turned on (moves the V gate 650d to the guide position). Thus, counting is started, and when the counter value of the open counter 203n exceeds a predetermined value, the V gate solenoid 650e2 is turned off (the V gate 650d is moved to the restriction position). In the V gate drive control process, the open counter 203n includes counter value addition (S1404 in FIG. 47), counter value discrimination (S1405 and S1406 in FIG. 47), and counter reset (S1407 in FIG. 47). Done.

  The closing counter 203o is a counter used for driving control of the V gate 650d that is a guide member provided in the second variable winning device 650, and turns off the V gate solenoid 650e2 based on the counter value of the opening counter 203n described above. Thus, counting is started, and when the counter value of the closing counter 203o exceeds a predetermined value, the V gate solenoid 650e2 is turned on (the V gate 650e is moved to the guidance position). In the V gate control process, the closing counter 203o performs addition of the counter value (S1410 in FIG. 47), discrimination of the counter value (S1411 in FIG. 47), and resetting of the counter (S1407 in FIG. 47).

  The above-described open counter 203n and close counter 203o are configured to add 1 to the value in the timer interrupt process that is executed every 2 milliseconds. Therefore, when the opening time of the V gate is 1.5 seconds, it is determined whether the value of the opening counter 203n exceeds 750, and when the closing time of the V gate 650d is 3.5 seconds, It may be determined whether or not the value of the closing counter 203o exceeds 1750.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the values of various counter values are added by the timer interrupt process is shown. However, any configuration that can measure an accurate period may be used. You may measure using a period. In this embodiment, the opening counter 203n and the closing counter 203o are configured separately, but the opening period and the closing period may be measured by one counter.

  The jackpot scenario counter 203p is a counter for updating a jackpot scenario in which the opening / closing timing of the specific door 65f is defined. Based on the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot scenario counter 203p, the jackpot scenario counter 203p Release control is executed. The jackpot scenario counter 203p is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the jackpot control process that a jackpot scenario is set (S1802 in FIG. 51), and the control based on the jackpot scenario ends in the jackpot ending control process. After the setting is cleared, it is reset (S1905 in FIG. 52).

  The small hit scenario counter 203q is a counter for updating the small hit scenario in which the operation timings of various devices (ball stop member 650c, door 650f) are defined, and the small hit scenario counter 203q is updated by the small hit scenario counter 203q. Based on the hit scenario, operation control of various devices is executed during the small hit. The small hit scenario counter 203q is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the small hit control process that a small hit scenario is set (S2002 in FIG. 53), and control based on the small hit scenario is performed in the small hit ending control process. Is completed and the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared (S2111 in FIG. 54).

  The special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is a flag for storing a period during which the winning to the second entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid in the second special symbol (special figure 2), In addition to the period in which the special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is set to ON (the period in which the winning to the second entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid), the second entrance B (special figure 2B) It is used for the process of discriminating that the winning to 640b is detected as an error (S803 in FIG. 41).

  This special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is set to ON after the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entry device 640 is started until an effective period measurement counter 203s described later measures a predetermined period. The The special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is set to ON in the normal symbol variation process (S1025 in FIG. 43), and is set to OFF in the normal symbol variation process after a predetermined period has elapsed (S1004 in FIG. 43).

  The effective period measurement counter 203s measures a period during which the above-described special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is set to ON (a period in which winning to the second entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is effective). This is a counter, and while the value of this effective period measurement counter 203s is being subtracted (while 1000 is set as the counter value and is subtracted until the counter value becomes 0), the special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is set to ON.

  The effective period measurement counter 203s is set to ON in the normal symbol variation process (S1026 in FIG. 43), and 1000 is set as the counter value. Then, 1 is subtracted in the normal symbol variation process executed every 2 milliseconds as the timer interrupt process (S1002 in FIG. 43), and the process is repeated until the counter value becomes 0 (until 2 seconds elapses).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15, details of various tables included in the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described.

  First, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the first hit random number table 202a, the value “0” of the first hit random number counter C1 is used as the big hit determination value, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is used as the small hit determination value. The value “399” of the first hit random number counter C1 is set as a determination value for “1 to 398” other than the big hit and the small hit (displacement).

  In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery becomes a big hit with a probability of “1/400”, a small hit with a probability of “398/400”, and a probability of “1/400”. The lottery result of the special symbol is almost a small hit.

  Next, the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 10B, in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the value “0-49” of the first jackpot type counter C2 as the judgment value of the jackpot A is set as “50-99” as the judgment value of the jackpot B. "Is set. For the big hit C and big hit D, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is not set. It is a jackpot type set by passing through the V discharge flow path 650e3 which is a specific area in the second variable winning device 650.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the big hit game is started, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a large amount of winning balls are obtained by entering the gaming ball into the specific winning port 65a. A game is executed. In addition, a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot game ends according to the jackpot type.

  Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for two rounds (2R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the short-time game state (short-time) is awarded eight times. When the jackpot B is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for five rounds (5R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the short-time game state (short-time) is awarded eight times.

  When the jackpot C is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 10 rounds (10R) is started, but the short-time game state (short-time) is not given after the jackpot game is ended. When the jackpot D is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 10 rounds (10R) is started, and after the jackpot game is finished, the short-time game state (short-time) is awarded eight times.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, winning the special symbol jackpot (big jackpot A or jackpot B) will always shift to the short-time gaming state after the jackpot game ends, but the jackpot game round The number is set smaller than jackpot C or jackpot D. This is because jackpots (jackpots C or jackpots D) executed by adding a specific area during a jackpot game can make the player think that he has won the jackpot on his own, This is to make the privilege by C or jackpot D more advantageous for the player.

  FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 10C, in the first small hit type selection table 202c, a special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 and a special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 are set. The selection ratio of the small hit type is changed between the hit and the small hit according to FIG. Here, the type selection table 202c1 for special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1. As shown in FIG. 11 (a), in the case of the small hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), in the small hit type counter C5, the small hit when the random number value is “0 to 34” The type is “small hit A”. The small hit type when the random value is “35-40” is “small hit B”. The small hit type when the random value is “41 to 398” is “small hit C”.

  Here, the small hit type will be described with reference to FIG. First, when “small hit A” is selected, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is set to 1 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the game ball easily wins the second variable winning device 650. An opening scenario for opening for .5 seconds is set, and “big hit D” is set as a big hit type given when passing through a specific region provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 (at the time of passing V). In addition, when “small hit B” is selected, the ball (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is set to 0. 0 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the ball is difficult to win the second variable winning device 650. An open scenario in which the operation of releasing for 1 second is performed three times is set, and “big hit D” is set as a big hit type that is given when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 (at the time of passing V) Is set. Also, when “small hit C” is selected, an open scenario similar to “small hit D” is set, and when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 (when V passes) ) Is set as the jackpot type to be given.

  In this way, depending on each small hit type, a small hit game that opens the second variable winning device 650 by differentiating the opening pattern of the door (attacker) 650f in the small hit game and the big hit type given when passing V In addition, it is possible to set a small hitting which is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable small hitting, and it is possible to provide various game playability.

  Next, the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2. As shown in FIG. 11 (b), in the case of the small hit of the second special symbol (special drawing 2), in the small hit type counter C5, the small hit when the random number value is “0 to 85” The type is “small hit A”. The small hit type when the random value is “86 to 90” is “small hit B”. The small hit type when the random value is “91 to 398” is “small hit C”.

  In the present embodiment, the winning ratio of each special symbol (the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2)) is made different depending on the gaming state (the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state). It is configured. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, since the game aiming at the first pitching device 64 is performed, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are alternately won, so the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are won. Although the ratio is configured to be 1: 1, in the short-time gaming state, a game (right-handed game) aiming at the second pitching device 640 is performed, so that there is no winning in Special Figure 1.

  Therefore, as described above, by changing the selection ratio of the selected small hit type between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a game advantageous to the player can be provided according to the gaming state. Further, although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous (easy to pass V) state to the player due to the continuous “small hit A”. Expect to win “Small Bonus A” consecutively depending on whether the next prize winning “Small Bonus A” is Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 in the normal gaming state where the prizes and Special Figure 2 win alternately. Since the degree changes, it is possible to provide the player with a new gameability of continuously winning “small hit A”, and there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest.

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 11C, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 12A) and a variation pattern selection table 202e2 for removal (see FIG. 12B). ) And a small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (see FIG. 13) are set.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1. The jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is defined. The variation patterns of various jackpots are selected based on the number of reserved balls, the presence / absence of a short-time gaming state (short-time), and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The number of fluctuations after the jackpot is the number of lotteries for the special symbol for which the variation pattern is selected this time after the jackpot game ends. The lottery for the first rotation after the jackpot game ends When selecting a variation pattern indicating the result, the number of variations after jackpot end “1” is referred to, and the number of variations after end of jackpot “2” is selected otherwise. In this way, by setting a variation pattern that differs only at a specific variation timing in the variation pattern selection of the special symbol, it is possible to provide the player with a variation pattern that appears only at the specific variation timing. There is an effect that the situation of getting tired of the contents of can be suppressed.

  Here, as will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute a special effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the first rotation after the end of the big hit is “small hit A”. (See FIGS. 32 to 33). Therefore, the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e is defined so that a variation pattern display mode different from the other cases is selected only in the first rotation after the jackpot ends.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10, when the number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (seven) at the timing of selecting the variation pattern, V discharge is performed in the small hit game if the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is configured to provide a situation in which it easily passes through a specific area provided in the flow path 650e3. Therefore, the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e is set so that the variation pattern display mode (variation time) varies depending on the number of reserved balls.

  Returning to FIG. 12A, the description will be continued. In the big hit variation pattern selection table 202e1, a short time variation A to a short time variation D are set as variation patterns to be selected for the short time gaming state (with short time), and a big hit variation A to be selected as a variation pattern to be selected for the normal gaming state. C is set. First, the short time variation A to the short time variation D selected in the short time gaming state will be described. The short-time fluctuation A is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds when the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 98” when the number of fluctuations is 1 after the big hit and the number of held balls is 0 to 2. It is. The short time variation B is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 30 seconds when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “99 to 198” in the same state as the short time variation A.

  The time variation C and the time variation D are the time variation C (variation when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 98” in a gaming state other than the gaming state in which the time variation A or the time variation B is set. When the time (4 seconds) is “99 to 198”, the short time fluctuation D (fluctuation time 6.5 seconds) is set.

  Next, the jackpot fluctuations A to C selected in the normal gaming state will be described. In the normal gaming state, the variation pattern is set only by the value of the variation type counter CS1, regardless of the gaming state (the number of variations after the big hit and the number of held balls). The jackpot variation A is a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds set when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 98”, and the jackpot variation B has a value of “99 to 149” in the variation type counter CS1. ”Is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 25 seconds, and the jackpot variation C is a variation pattern in which the variation time set when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is“ 150 to 198 ”is 60 seconds. is there.

  Next, the deviation variation pattern selection table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation variation pattern selection table 202e2. Similarly to the big hit variation pattern selection table described above, the outlier variation pattern selection table 202e2 is also set to the number of changes after the big hit, the current number of reserved balls, the presence / absence of a short game state (short time), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 Based on this, only the different variation patterns (variation times) are selected for the big hit variation pattern, and the description is omitted.

  Next, the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3. The small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 also has the same number of variations after the big hit, the current number of held balls, the presence / absence of a short-time game state (short time), and the variation type counter CS1 as in the above-described selection of the big hit variation pattern. Various small hit variation patterns are selected based on the value of.

  The variation pattern selection table 202e3 for small hits has a special variation A when the number of variations after the big hit is one and is in a short-time gaming state (short time), and the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A. In addition, special fluctuations B to C are selected when the number of fluctuations after the jackpot is 2 or more and the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7, respectively.

  Here, the special variation A will be described. The special variation A is a special variation that is selected when a continuous jackpot effect (see FIGS. 31 to 34) described later is executed. The special variation A has a specific variation time (30 seconds) defined as a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation in the first rotation after the big hit is completed in order to execute a continuous jackpot effect.

  The detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The continuous jackpot effect is a small bonus when the small bonus A is won in the variation of the special symbol in the first rotation after the big bonus is finished. The timing at which the door 650f of the second variable prize-winning device 650 is opened and the timing at which the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize-winning device 650 is in the guidance state in the winning A game is calculated in advance, and after the big hit It is determined whether or not the timing of the change of the special symbol at the first rotation, that is, the timing at which the big hit game ends is the timing at which the small hit A game at the first rotation after the big hit ends can pass through the V discharge channel 650e3. Then, based on the determination result, the effect during the jackpot game (the final round and the effect during the ending period) is determined.

  Next, the special variation B will be described. The special variation B is a special variation that is selected when a small hit continuous effect (FIGS. 27 to 30) described later is executed. This is because, as a result of lottery of special symbols, when the small hit A is continuously executed, the special variation B is selected as each fluctuation pattern when the small hit A is continuously executed. This is a variation pattern for setting the timing at which the door 650f of the second variable prize-winning device 650 opens in the small hitting A game to be different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d.

  Here, the variation pattern (variation time) set when the special variation B is selected will be described. In the present embodiment, the special variation B is selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A and the number of reserved balls at the time of selecting the variation pattern is 5 or 6. This special variation B is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 5.5 seconds. The detailed description will be made with reference to FIG. 27. However, when the small hit A is continuously selected and the special variation B is selected, the execution timing of the continuous small hit A is set to the V gate 650d. The small hits A are executed at different timings with respect to the execution cycle (in this embodiment, timings that are different by 1.5 seconds).

  In this way, in the next special symbol lottery that has won the small hit A, if the predetermined condition (the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6) is established, When winning, the variation pattern (variation time) is defined so that the small hit A is executed at different timings with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. The small hit A can be easily executed at a timing at which the ball can pass through the V gate 650d in the state (the advantageous small hit game can be easily executed).

  Next, the special variation C will be described. The special variation C is a special variation that is selected when performing the small hit consecutive effects (FIGS. 27 to 30) described later. When the small hit A is continued, the first small hit game is executed. This is a fluctuation pattern for setting the timing to be constant.

  The small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 is the same as the big hit variation pattern selection table described above except that the special variations A to C described above are provided. The variation pattern for various small hits is selected based on the presence or absence of the short-time gaming state (short time) and the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected for the variation pattern for big hit is different. Since only the differences are described, the description is omitted.

  In the above-described various variation pattern tables, various variation patterns (variation times) are selected according to the game state (number of variations after jackpot end, number of reserved balls, presence / absence of time reduction) and the value of the variation type counter CS1. However, in this pachinko machine 10, the larger the number of reserved balls, the larger the winning through the small hit game, that is, the specific region in the second variable winning device 650 (passage detection in the V discharge flow path 650e3 Since the degree of expectation to pass through the switch 650e5) can be increased, a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) is selected as an opportunity to store a plurality of reserved balls.

  Next, the jackpot scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario table 202f. The jackpot scenario table 202f is defined so that a jackpot scenario corresponding to each jackpot type selected by the first jackpot type selection table 202b can be selected, and a jackpot game is executed based on the selected jackpot scenario.

  The jackpot scenario table 202f includes jackpot scenarios a202f1 dedicated to jackpot A, jackpot scenarios b202f2 dedicated to jackpot B, and jackpot scenarios c202f3 dedicated to jackpot C or D as selected jackpot scenarios.

  Next, the jackpot scenario a202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario a202f1. When the jackpot scenario is set, the jackpot scenario counter 203p starts counting (S1802 in FIG. 51), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p are executed. The counter value is added in the main process of the main controller 110 executed at a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and when the counter value is incremented by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

  When jackpot scenario a is set and the counter value reaches 1250 (5 seconds have elapsed), the jackpot opening period ends, and when the counter value is updated to 1251, the specific door 65f of the first variable pitching device 65 is opened. In order to do this, the specific door solenoid 65a2 is set to ON (start of one round). Thereafter, when the counter value reaches 8750 (35 seconds have elapsed), that is, when 30 seconds have elapsed after the specific door 65f is opened, the specific door solenoid 65a2 is set to OFF in order to close the specific door 65f (one round ends). .

  In addition, the closing condition (end condition) of the specific door 65f in one round of the pachinko machine is when 30 seconds have passed since the specific door 65f opened and when 10 balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. is there. Although details will be described later, when 10 balls have won the specific winning opening 65a by 30 seconds after the specific door 65f is opened, the value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is set to 8749 (1 at the end of one round). It is configured to execute the process of updating up to the previous).

  With this configuration, the counter value is incremented by 1 and the counter value becomes 8750, so that the operation control for closing the specific door 65f is executed. Therefore, the door closing control is executed for each of the plurality of round end conditions. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load and prevent the malfunction of the operation control of the specific door solenoid when each round end condition occurs at substantially the same timing.

  Thereafter, until the counter value reaches 9250, that is, 2 seconds after the end of the first round, the state where the specific door 65f is closed is maintained as the interval period between rounds, and the counter value reaches 9251. Then, the operation control is executed to start the next round, and the specific door solenoid is set to ON to open the specific door 65f (second round). When the counter value reaches 16750, the specific door solenoid is set to OFF as in the first round (end of the second round).

  This jackpot scenario a202f1 is a jackpot scenario corresponding to jackpot A, which is a two-round jackpot, so when the second round ends, until the counter value reaches 18000 (until 5 seconds have elapsed from the end of the second round), the jackpot ending period Is executed. Thus, the jackpot game that is executed until the jackpot A in which the jackpot scenario a is set is the longest counter value reaches 18000 (72 seconds) is provided.

  Next, the jackpot scenario b202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario b202f2. This jackpot scenario b202f2 is a jackpot scenario in which the jackpot type is set for jackpot B (5-round jackpot), and the description is omitted because the number of rounds executed is different from the jackpot scenario a202f1 described above. To do.

  In the present embodiment, only the operation control of the specific door 65f is shown as the control executed based on the jackpot scenario, but other control may be executed based on the jackpot scenario. For example, a period obtained by adding a predetermined time to the period in which the specific door 65f is opened is set as a winning effective period for the first specific winning opening 65a, and it is determined whether or not the winning of the ball to the first specific winning opening 65a is normal. You may be able to do it.

  Next, the small hit scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario table 202g. In this small hit scenario table 202g, small hit scenarios corresponding to the small hit types selected by the first small hit type selection table 202c are stored so as to be selectable. A game is executed.

  The small hit scenario table 202g has a small hit scenario a202g1 dedicated to the small hit A and a small hit scenario b202g2 dedicated to the small hit B or C as the selected small hit scenarios.

  Next, the small hit scenario a202g1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario a202g1. When the small hit scenario is set, the small hit scenario counter 203q starts counting (S2002 in FIG. 53), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q are executed. The counter value is added in the main process of the main controller 110 executed at a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and when the counter value is incremented by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

  When the small hit scenario a is set and the counter value becomes 1, the small hit opening period is started, and the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to ON to project the stopper 650c to the ball stop position. Next, when the counter value reaches 625 (2.5 seconds have passed since the small hitting start), the small hitting opening period ends, and when the counter value reaches 626, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The door solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (start of round). Thereafter, when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have elapsed), that is, when 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the door 650f was opened, the door solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF to close the door 650f (round end).

  When the counter value reaches 1001, a small hitting ending period is started. During this small hitting ending period, when the counter value reaches 1125, that is, when 0.5 seconds elapses after the door 650f is closed, the ball stop solenoid is moved to retract the stopper 650c to the ball stop release position. 650c2 is set to off. This discharges the balls staying in the second variable winning device 650 (excluding the balls staying at the ball stop position) with the door 650f closed to the outside of the second variable winning device 650. In order to provide a grace time (0.5 seconds), the small hit scenario is configured to set the stopper ball stop solenoid 650c2 to OFF after 0.5 seconds after the door solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF. Is.

  With this configuration, when the stopper 650c is released, a situation in which a ball other than the ball retained at the ball stop position flows down toward the V gate 650d is prevented, and an unexpected game ( There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the execution of a game in which a plurality of balls flow down toward the V gate in one small hit game.

  Returning to FIG. 15B, the description will be continued. When the counter value reaches 1250, that is, when 0.5 seconds elapses after the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF, the ball passes through the passage detection switch (specific region) 650e5 in the V discharge passage 650e3 (V passage). A period (counter value 1250 to 1500) for validating the above is set. The period from when the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF until the passage of V is made valid is from when the ball staying at the ball stop position is released from the stopper 650c to pass through the specific area. Is set to the shortest time (0.5 seconds) necessary for. Therefore, it is possible to effectively handle that the ball staying in the stopper 650c passes through the specific area, and invalidate the ball that has passed through the specific area during the small hit game other than the period during which the V pass is valid. Therefore, for example, the ball can be intentionally retained in the second variable prize-winning device 650, and an illegal game that passes through a specific area during the small hit game can be prevented.

  When the counter value reaches 1500, the small hitting ending period ends, the V passing effective period ends, and the small hit game ends. In the small hit scenario a202g1, a door passable period is set between a counter value 626 and 1125 as a period for validating the winning of a ball to the second specific winning port 650a. By setting the valid period in this way, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the winning or passing of the ball is normal.

  Next, the small hit scenario b202g2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario b202g2. The small hit scenario b202g2 is a small hit scenario corresponding to the small hit B or small hit C, and it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 650 by opening and closing the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 at high speed. It is a scenario that provides a small hit game.

  The opening period during the small hit game is different from the small hit scenario a202g1 only in that it is set to be shorter by one second, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the ending period during the small hit game is the same as the small hit scenario a202g1, the description thereof is omitted. Hereinafter, the scenario content of the round period during the small hit game will be described.

  When the small hit game is started and the counter value reaches 376, the door solenoid 650f2 is turned on to open the door 650f, and when the counter value reaches 401, the door solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the door 650f. Is set. That is, in the small hit scenario 202g2, the opening time of one time of the door 650f is set to 0.1 second. This opening operation is repeated three times, and when the counter value reaches 901, the round ends.

  Thus, in the small hit scenario b, the opening time of one door 650f is set to a time when it is difficult for the ball to enter 0.1 seconds. Further, the total opening time (0.3 seconds (0.1 seconds × 3 times)) in which the door 650f is opened in the small hit scenario b becomes the door 650f opening time (1.5 seconds) in the small hit scenario a. On the other hand, since the time is set to one-fifth, the ball provides a small hit game that is difficult to win in the second variable winning device 650.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, a variation pattern selection table 222a, a game specification storage area 222b, a V gate scenario 222c, a precursor effect selection table 222d, a continuous effect type selection table 222e, and a continuous effect change pattern selection A table 222f, a continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222g, a small hitting medium effect pattern selection table 222h, and a precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i are stored. The fluctuation pattern table 222a is already well known and will be described briefly. Based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command are described. More detailed variation contents are determined from the type (reach, miss, etc.). As a result, more various variation modes can be determined.

  The game specification storage area 222b is an area in which various specifications set in the main control device 110 are stored, and is a jackpot stored in at least the various variation pattern selection table 202e and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Information on the scenario table 202f and the small hit scenario table 202g is stored.

  The information stored in the game specification storage area 222b is referred to when acquiring the door opening timing based on the next or subsequent fluctuations in the V-passable fluctuation determination process (S3702 and S3703 in FIG. 70) or a jackpot. In the start process, it is referred to when acquiring the door opening timing in the small hit game of the first rotation after the big hit game ends (S2804 in FIG. 61).

  The V gate scenario 222c is a scenario in which the operation timing of the V gate 650d driven and controlled by the main controller 110, that is, the timing for setting the V gate solenoid 650d on and the timing for setting it off are set. In the V gate command reception process, the V gate scenario 222c is set (S2506 in FIG. 58), and the operation timing of the V gate 650d is grasped on the voice lamp control device 222 side based on the counter value of the V counter 223t described later. Used for. It is also used to determine whether the V gate state command received from the main controller 110 side matches the contents of the V gate scenario 222c corresponding to the counter value of the V counter 223t (S2504 in FIG. 58). .

  The sign effect selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect contents of the sign effect that is executed based on the reserved number and the value of the effect counter 223g when the sign effect counter 223p described later is 3 or more. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. This precursor effect selection table 222d is referred to when selecting a precursor effect in the precursor fluctuation pattern selection process (S3403 in FIG. 67).

  Here, the prelude effect is a state in which the reserved memory whose special symbol lottery result is the small hit A is continuously displayed in the special symbol hold memory (hereinafter, the small hit A continuous executable state). When the display is performed, the player is informed that the number of reserved symbols stored in the special symbol is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 8). It is an effect to perform.

  The continuous effect type selection table 222e is a table that defines the type of continuous effect that is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 18A. In this continuous effect type selection table 222e, the number of times of executing the continuous effect (two or three times in the present embodiment) and the V-passable fluctuation are present. The continuous performance type is selected based on the order of execution (current time, next time or next time). The continuous effect type selection table 222e is referred to when selecting a continuous effect type in the continuous effect type selection process (S3606, S3607, S3610, S3612, S3613 in FIG. 69).

  Here, the continuous effect means that when the variation pattern corresponding to the first small hit A in the small hit A continuous executable state is selected, the number of reserved symbols stored in the special symbol is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (seven or more). In this case, the effect is executed as an effect associating the variable display corresponding to the continuous small hit A and the display during the small hit game.

  The continuous effect change pattern selection table 222f is a table that defines a change pattern corresponding to each change during the continuous effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. The continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is referred to when a variation pattern is selected in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3505 in FIG. 68).

  The continuous production variation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222g is a table that defines a variation pattern corresponding to each variation when a new prize (additional prize) occurs during the continuous production. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. This continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222g is referred to when a variation pattern is selected in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3504 in FIG. 68).

  The small hitting effect pattern selection table 222h is a table that defines the contents of the effect display executed during the small hitting game. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. This small hitting medium effect pattern selection table 222h is referred to when selecting a small hitting effect pattern in the small hitting start effect process (S3101 in FIG. 64).

  The sign effect variation pattern selection table 222i is a table that defines whether or not to execute the SW effect as the sign effect when the condition for enabling the sign effect is satisfied. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. The precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the precursor variation pattern selection process (S3401 in FIG. 67).

  Next, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, and a change start flag 223e are stored. A stop type selection flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a V gate initial flag 223i, a V gate state storage area 223j, an opening timing storage area 223k, and a V pass variable storage area 223m. A specific small hit consecutive counter 223n, a small consecutive hit count storage area 223o, a precursor effect counter 223p, a continuation flag 223q, an end information storage area 223r, a continuous big hit effect flag 223s, and a V counter 223t. Production flag 22 And u, the continuous effect of counter 223v, a continuous rendering genre selection flag 223w, an additional winning flag 223X, and SW effective time 1 counter 223Y, and SW valid time 2 counter 223α is provided with at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to eighth area), and in each of these areas, counters C1 to C3 and C5 which are winning information are provided. Each value is stored. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is made in the main controller 110, a first per-random number counter C1, a first big hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a small hit obtained according to the start win Based on each value of the type counter C5, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, Various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to eighth) among the vacant areas of the eight areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the held ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b holds the reserved ball of the first special symbol. Manage numbers.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64a, or variation display in a special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (S2410 in FIG. 57). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the normal symbol based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 with respect to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The variation start flag 223e is set to ON when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2402 in FIG. 57), and the variation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is set in the variation display setting process. Is set to OFF when S is performed (S3202 in FIG. 65). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and display control is performed in the command output process (S2302 in FIG. 56) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. Sent to device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2405 in FIG. 57), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S3208 in FIG. 65). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used for the notice effect and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S2312 in FIG. 56).

  The round number accumulation counter 223h is a counter that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game. Each time a round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, 1 is added (S2704 in FIG. 60), and the counter value is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect process (S2906 in FIG. 62). In the sound lamp controller 113, a display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2708 in FIG. 60), and the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h indicates the final round of the jackpot game. When the value becomes the value, the final round command for display is set (S2707 in FIG. 60), and an effect based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .

  The V gate initial flag 223i is a flag used for grasping the V gate opening timing on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and is set to ON in the start-up process (S2212 in FIG. 55). In FIG. 58, the V gate scenario 222c is set and then turned off (S2507 in FIG. 58). The V gate initial flag 223i synchronizes the operation state of the V gate based on the V gate state command received from the main controller 110 and the scenario contents of the V gate scenario 222c by updating the counter value of the V counter 223t described later. It is set to ON only after the power is turned on.

  With this configuration, of the V gate state commands transmitted from the main controller 110 every 4 milliseconds, the V gate state command indicating the release that is transmitted first after the power is turned on (S1403 in FIG. 47). ) As a reference, the V-gate scenario 222c can be set. Further, by setting the V gate scenario 222c on the sound lamp control device 113 side, it becomes possible to predict the timing at which the V gate opens in the future.

  The V gate state storage area 223j is an area for storing V gate state information (information indicating whether the V gate is in an open state or a closed state) based on the V gate state command received from the main controller 110. This V gate state storage area 223j stores V gate state information in the V gate command reception process (S2501 in FIG. 58), and is referred to when determining whether or not it matches the contents of the V gate scenario 222c (FIG. 58 S2504).

  The opening timing storage area 223k is an area for storing the V gate opening timing at which the V gate calculated based on the set V gate scenario 222c is opened. This release timing storage area 223k stores the V gate release timing in the V gate command reception process (S2508 in FIG. 58), and is referred to when determining the V pass change in the V pass change determination process (see FIG. 58). S3704 in FIG. 70).

  The V-passable fluctuation storage area 223m is an area for storing fluctuations determined to be V-passable in the V-passable fluctuation determination process. This V-passable variation storage area 223m stores whether the variation determined to be V-passable in the V-passable variation determination process is the current variation, the next variation, or the next variation (see FIG. 70 (S3706, S3708, S3709), the stored information is referred to in the continuous effect type selection process (S3605, S3609, S3611 in FIG. 69), and the value of the counter during continuous effect 223v described later in the small hit start effect process Is cleared when 0 is zero (S3109 in FIG. 64).

  The specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is a counter that counts the number of consecutive receptions of the winning command including the winning information indicating that the special symbol lottery result is the small hit A from the main controller 110. The specific small hit continuation counter 223n is incremented by 1 when it is determined that a winning command including winning information indicating a small hit A is received in the winning command receiving process (S2610 in FIG. 59). In the processing, it is referred to when it is determined that a winning command including winning information other than the small hit A is received (S2605 in FIG. 59), and then reset to 0 (2608 in FIG. 59).

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n becomes 2 or more, that is, when a winning command is received so that the small hit A is continuously executed, the small hit A continuous execution is possible. State.

  When it is determined that a winning command including winning information other than the small hit A is received in the winning command receiving process, the value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is a predetermined number ( In the present embodiment, in the case of 2) or more, this is an area for temporarily storing the value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n. The value temporarily stored in the small hit consecutive number storage area 223o is set in the continuous effect counter 223v in the continuous effect type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69), and then the stored value is cleared ( S3602 in FIG. 69).

  The small hit consecutive number storage area 223o stores the value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n added based on the winning command received from the main control device 110 until the timing for selecting the variation pattern based on the winning command. Storage area.

  The precursor effect counter 223p is a counter in which the current number of reserved balls is set when the small hitting A continuous execution state is established. When the value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is determined to be 2 in the winning command reception process, the precursor effect counter 223p is set with the current number of reserved balls (S2612 in FIG. 59), and the precursor fluctuation pattern Subtraction is performed in the selection process (S3405 in FIG. 67).

  Then, it is referred to in the variation pattern selection process (S3302 in FIG. 66), and is reset to 0 when the value of the counter 223v during continuous effect is determined to be 0 in the small hitting start effect process (S3108 in FIG. 64). . When the value of the precursor effect counter 223p is larger than a predetermined value (2 in the present embodiment), the precursor effect can be executed.

  The continuation flag 223q is a flag that is set to ON in order to execute a continuous jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game. This continuation flag 223q is the result of the small hit game when the variation determined as the V-passable variation in the V-passable variation process is not the final variation in which the continuous effect is set, that is, When the jackpot game is executed and the first special symbol variation that starts after the jackpot game ends is a variation that is won by the jackpot A (S3608 in FIG. 69), the jackpot start effect is set. In the process, the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to off after being set to on (S2811 in FIG. 61).

  By setting this continuation flag 223q to on, a continuous jackpot effect is executed in the final round of the jackpot game.

  In the end information storage area 223r, when the result of the first rotation after the big hit is the small hit A, the opening timing of the door 650f in the small hit game and the V gate stored in the V gate open timing storage area 223k This is a storage area for storing the jackpot end timing (the end timing of the last round in the jackpot game) that becomes the jackpot game in which the small hit game of the first rotation after the jackpot ends is V-passable based on the gate opening timing.

  The end information storage area 223r stores the jackpot end timing calculated when it is determined that the continuation flag 223q is set to ON in the jackpot start effect process (S2809 in FIG. 61). (S2903 in FIG. 62) and then cleared (S2907 in FIG. 62).

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the end timing of the last round in the jackpot game matches the end timing stored in the end information storage area 223r, and if it does not match, the display jackpot failure ending command matches Sets the jackpot success ending command for display.

  The continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is a flag that is turned on in order to set the final round effect in the jackpot game as the continuous jackpot effect. The continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON after the final round end timing is stored in the end information storage area 223r in the jackpot start effect process (S2810 in FIG. 61), and is referred to in the jackpot end effect process (FIG. 62). In step S2901, the display ending command based on the end timing of the final round is set and then turned off (S2905 in FIG. 62).

  The V counter 223t is a counter for updating the V gate scenario 222c. The V counter 223t is incremented by 1 when the value of the V counter 223t is not 5000 (less than 5000) in the V counter update process (S3903 in FIG. 72), and when the value of the V counter 223t is 5000. The value of the V counter 223t is set to 1 (S3904 in FIG. 72).

  The V counter 223t is configured to set the value to 1 when the count is updated to 5000. This is because the control content based on the scenario defined in the V gate scenario 222c is the content of repeatedly executing the control for 5 seconds, so the value of the V counter 223t is also equivalent to 5 seconds (counter value 5000). After counting, it was configured to be set to 1 again. With this configuration, the area for storing the value of the V counter 223t can be reduced.

  The continuous effect flag 223u is a flag that is set to ON during the continuous effect. This continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON when the value of the predictive effect counter 223p is 2 and the number of held balls is larger than 6 in the predictor variation pattern selection process (S3408 in FIG. 67), and a small hitting start is made. Reference is made when an effect pattern is selected in the effect process (S3101 in FIG. 64), and is set to OFF when a later-described continuous effect counter 223v becomes 0 (S3106 in FIG. 64).

  Here, the continuous production means that the number of reserved memories is larger than a predetermined number when selecting a variation pattern corresponding to the first reserved memory among the reserved memories in the small hitting A continuous executable state (in the present embodiment, This is an effect that is executed in the case of more than six), and is an effect that is continuously executed in association with a plurality of variable display effects and effects during a small hit game. Detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The continuous effect counter 223v is a counter that counts the number of executions (remaining number of times) of the continuous effect. The continuous effect counter 223v is set to a value stored in the small hit number of consecutive times storage area 223o in the continuous effect type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69), and 1 is subtracted in the small hit start effect process (FIG. 69). 64 S3104). Further, it is referred to when a variation pattern is selected in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3504 and S3505 in FIG. 68). The subtraction in the small hit start effect process is executed until the counter value becomes zero.

  Based on the value of the counter during continuous production 223v, the continuous production variation pattern selection table 222f and the continuous production variation pattern selection table (additional prize) are identified by identifying the number of times of variation of the continuous production that is selected this time. At 222g, an appropriate variation pattern is selected.

  The continuous effect type selected flag 223w is a flag that is set to ON so that the continuous effect type is not reset. The continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON when a continuous effect type is selected in the continuous effect type selection process (S3614 in FIG. 69), and is referred to in the continuous effect change pattern selection process (S3501 in FIG. 68). In the small hitting start effect process, when the value of the counter during continuous effect 223v is determined to be 0, it is set to off (S3110 in FIG. 64).

  The additional winning flag 223x is a flag that is set to ON when a new winning (additional winning) occurs while the continuous effect is being executed. This additional winning flag 223x is set to ON when the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON in the winning command reception process (S2603 in FIG. 59), and is referred to in the continuous effect change pattern selection process (FIG. 68, S3503). If the value of the counter 223v during continuous effect is 0 in the small hit start effect process, it is set to OFF (3107 in FIG. 64).

  This additional winning flag 223x is a process that assumes a variation pattern (variation time) of the next variation or the one after another variation that is executed when selecting a variation pattern in which the continuous rendering is started when an additional winning is generated during the execution of the continuous rendering. The number of reserved balls used is different from the number of reserved balls used when selecting the actually executed variation pattern (variation time), indicating that a variation pattern different from the variation pattern assumed in advance is selected. Is.

  Therefore, when an additional prize is generated during execution of the continuous effect and the additional prize flag 223x is set to ON, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is added to the continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional). Winner) will be selected from 222g.

  The SW valid time 1 counter 223y is a counter that counts the time during which the operation of the frame button 22 (the frame left button 22a or the frame right button 22b) is valid during the SW effect. The SW effective time 1 counter 223y counts the effective time of the SW effect (see FIGS. 28 to 29) executed during the continuous effect, and a predetermined time is set in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 68, 3506), and is subtracted in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S3802 in FIG. 71), and when the frame button 22 is operated, the counter value is reset to 0 (S3805 in FIG. 71).

  The SW valid time 2 counter 223α is a counter that counts the time for which the operation of the frame button 22 (the frame left button 22a or the frame right button 22b) is valid during the SW effect. This SW effective time 2 counter 223α counts the effective time of the SW effect (see FIG. 26) executed in the precursor effect, and when the variation pattern having the SW effect is selected in the precursor variation pattern selection process. Is set to a value of 5000 (equivalent to 5 seconds), and is subtracted in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S3807 in FIG. 71). When the frame button 22 is operated, the counter value is reset to 0 (S3810 in FIG. 71).

  In this way, by setting the SW valid time in advance in each SW effect, for example, the frame button is only displayed while the display for guiding the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81 is being executed. 22 can be made effective, the player unintentionally operates the frame button 22, and as a result, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 becomes the operation of the frame button 22. The situation of switching based on this can be eliminated, and the quality of the SW effect in the gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19, various tables and the like included in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. First, the game specification storage area 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game specification storage area 222b. Various game specifications (game information) set in the main control device 110 are stored in the game specification storage area 222b, and at least small hit scenario information and variation pattern information are used as information used in the sound lamp control device 113. Is remembered. The small hit scenario information stores the time of each small hit scenario, the opening timing and the open period of the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit A and the small hits B to C, respectively. Each variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection table 202e and its variation time are stored as information. In addition, information based on selection conditions and jackpot scenarios when special variations A to C are selected is also stored (not shown).

  In this way, by storing the various game specifications stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 on the sound lamp control device 113 side, the sound is controlled based on the winning command and the number-of-holding balls command received from the main control device 110. It is possible to assume a futuristic game timing on the lamp control device 113 side. For example, the winning command receiving process continuously receives a winning command including winning information for which the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and when the variation pattern based on the first winning information is selected, the number of reserved balls is 7 As a variation pattern based on the first winning information, a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation C (variation time 4 seconds) is selected by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. If a winning command based on a new winning (additional winning) is not received before the next change is started, the next change is that the lottery result is a small hit A, and the number of held balls when the changing pattern is selected is Since there are six, it can be assumed that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special fluctuation B (fluctuation time 5.5 seconds) is transmitted from the main controller 110.

  In addition, since the game specification storage area 222b also stores information indicating the opening timing and the opening period of the door 650f of the second variable prize-winning device 650 during the small hit game, the current variation is the special variation B (variable It is possible to grasp that the door 650f is opened for 2.5 to 4 seconds after the small hit game of the small hit A is executed after the elapse of time (4 seconds) and the small hit game is started.

  Further, since it is assumed that the next fluctuation will be the special fluctuation B, if the big hit game is not executed by the small hit A game due to the current fluctuation, the special change will be made as the next fluctuation after the end of the current small hit game. Fluctuation B (fluctuation time 5.5 seconds) is executed, then a small hit game of small hit A is executed, and the door 650f is opened for 2.5 to 4 seconds after the small hit game is started. Can be grasped.

  That is, at the stage of selecting the current variation pattern, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened 6.5 seconds to 8 seconds and 16 seconds to 18.5 seconds after the current variation is started. Can be assumed.

  Further, by comparing with the opening timing information of the V gate stored in the opening timing storage area 223k described above, the opening timing of the door 650f based on the current variation and the opening timing of the door 650f based on the next variation are: It is also possible to determine whether it is the opening timing at which V can be passed, and it is possible to display a pre-effect based on the determination result on the third symbol display device. Therefore, it is possible to provide various advance effects more than advance notification based only on the winning command, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that the game specification storage area 222b of the present embodiment stores only the game specifications that are referred to by the control of the sound lamp control device 113 to reduce the storage capacity, but stores it in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. All information may be stored in the game specification storage area 222b. By doing in this way, the operation | work which produces another data for the audio lamp control apparatus 113 can be reduced.

  Next, the V gate scenario 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c. This V gate scenario 222c is a V counter 223t that is incremented by 1 each time a V counter update process (see FIG. 53) executed in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated every millisecond. The scenario corresponding to the count values 1 to 5000 of the V counter 223t is set.

  The scenario content of the V gate scenario 222c represents a state in which the V gate 650d is open until the counter value of the V counter 223t reaches 1 to 1500 (1.5 seconds), and the counter value is set to 1501 to 5000. This represents a state in which the V gate 650d is closed until it becomes (3.5 seconds).

  Then, when the counter value reaches 5000, a process for setting the counter value to 1 again and updating the counter value is performed (S3904 in FIG. 72). Since the voice lamp control device 113 has the V gate scenario 222c, the state of the V gate 650d (open or closed) can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and a future opening timing is assumed. It becomes possible.

  Further, since it becomes possible to compare the V gate state command received from the main controller 110 with the update state of the V gate scenario 222c, it is possible to detect early that a malfunction has occurred in the operation control of the V gate 650d. Is possible. Note that the actual operation state of the V gate 650d may be detected using a sensor or the like, and the actual operation state may be compared with the update state of the V gate scenario 222c. By configuring in this way, there is an effect that an illegal act such as outputting an illegal signal to the V opening solenoid 650d2 and operating the V gate 650d illegally can be detected at an early stage.

  Next, the indication effect selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the indication effect selection table 222d. The sign selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect contents of the sign effect that is executed based on the number of reserved balls (the number of reservations) and the effect counter 223g when the sign effect counter 223p is 3 or more. In the pattern selection process, it is referred to when selecting a precursor effect (S3403 in FIG. 67).

  Specifically, when the value of the indication effect counter 223p is 3 to 4, that is, when the order of execution of the variation based on the hold storage that is the target of the continuous effect is close, the value of the indication effect counter 223p is 5 to 5. In the case of 8, that is, when the order in which the variation based on the hold storage that is the target of the continuous effect is executed is far, the content selected in the precursor effect changes. For example, when the value of the indication effect counter 223p is 3 to 4 and the number of holdings is 7, the number of holdings of the special symbol is greater than or equal to a predetermined number at the timing when the variation based on the holding memory that is the target of the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, an effect that makes the player expect (for example, a great chance!) Is selected.

  On the other hand, when the value of the indication effect counter 223p is 5 to 8 and the number of holdings is 0 to 3, there is a time until the change based on the holding memory that is the target of the continuous effect is executed. An effect (for example, full power launch!) That suggests increasing the number is selected.

  In this embodiment, when winning a small hit A in succession and the change is executed, the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more (7 or more) is set as a condition for executing a continuous effect. In the above-mentioned indication effect, in the situation where the holding memory that has been won for the small hit A is continuously stored, the number of holdings is set to a predetermined number or more (7) until the variable display based on the holding memory is executed. It is an effect that suggests to make more than one).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prompt the player to store the reserved number up to a predetermined number or more, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the warning effect is changed based on the counter value of the warning effect counter 223p and the number of holds, but other than this, for example, based on a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) The display mode of the sign effect may be changed. For example, when the fluctuation time is long, since it is a chance to acquire a plurality of reserved memories, it is preferable to display contents indicating that. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to prevent the player from stopping the launch of the game ball while the fluctuation having a long fluctuation time is being executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the predicate effect can be executed only in a state where the hold memory won in the small hit A is continuously stored, but the hold memory won in the small hit A is not continuously stored. Even if it is a case, you may comprise so that an indication effect can be performed. By configuring in this way, even when the hold memory won in the small hit A is not continuously stored, the player who has seen the effect display by the sign effect tries to store the hold number up to the upper limit value. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, the continuous performance type selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous performance type selection table 222e. The continuous effect type selection table 222e includes the value of the counter 223v during continuous effect (2 or 3 in this embodiment) and the order of changes determined to be V-passable in the V-passability determination process (in this embodiment, this time). , Next time or next time), the type of continuous effect is selected.

  Specifically, when the value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is 2, the type of continuous performance in which two continuous performances (continuous performance executed across two variations) are executed is selected, and the value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is selected. In the case of 3, a continuous effect type in which three continuous effects (continuous effects executed across three variations) are executed is selected.

  Furthermore, when the order of the variation that can pass V is this time, the type of 2 continuous effects A or 3 continuous effects A is the next, and the type of 2 continuous effects B or 3 continuous effects B is the next time, respectively. The type of 3 consecutive effects C is selected. When the value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is 2, since the target of the continuous performance is 2 variations, the third variation (next time) is not selected.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is set to 3. However, the upper limit of the counter 223v during the continuous performance is not limited to this. You may set in the range to an upper limit (8 in this embodiment). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to lengthen the period when a continuous production is performed, and there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

  FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f. The continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3505 in FIG. 68), and the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 and the continuous effect type selection process. The variation pattern based on the selected continuous effect type (S3606, S3607, S3610, S3612 in FIG. 69) and the value (S3601 in FIG. 69) set in the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous effect in the continuous effect type selection process. Is selected.

  As an effect display mode of the variation pattern selected here, a chance effect that is an effect indicating that a small hit that can pass V is executed in the subsequent variation (see FIGS. 28B and 28C). A super-chance effect (see (a) and (b) of FIG. 29), which is an effect indicating that the current fluctuation is executed as a small hit that can pass V, and after a small hit that can pass V is executed. There are three types of thrilling effects (see (c) of FIG. 29) that are effects executed by fluctuation.

  In addition, based on the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance, a variation pattern in which a different variation time corresponding to each chance effect is set is selected. Specifically, in the state where 2 continuous effects A is selected as the continuous effect type, when the value of the counter 223v during continuous effects is 2, the super-chance effect A with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected as the variation pattern. The

  This is a case where 2 consecutive effects A is selected as the continuous effect type, and the value of the counter 223v during continuous effects is 2, the special symbol lottery result is a small hit A and the number of reserved balls is 7 This is because the variation pattern corresponding to the special variation C (variation time 4 seconds) is set.

  In addition, the above-mentioned pounding effect means that when the big hit game is not executed after the end of the small hit game that can pass V, that is, in the small hit game that can pass V, the second variable winning device 650 wins a ball. When the ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the effect corresponds to the variation of the special symbol that is executed after the small hit game that can pass through the V ends. In this exciting effect, an effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation as to whether or not the small hit game based on the variation of the corresponding special symbol can pass V is executed.

  If a new winning (additional winning) occurs during the continuous performance, it is assumed in the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command actually received from the main controller 110 and the V-passable variation determination process. Therefore, there is a possibility that the determination result of whether or not V can be passed is not a correct determination result. Therefore, when an additional prize is generated, the fluctuation pattern is selected using a dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table (continuous effect fluctuation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222g).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18C, the variation pattern selection when an additional prize is generated will be described. FIG. 18C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222g. This continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222g is a table that is referred to when an additional prize is generated, and a pounding effect is executed based on the variation pattern (variation time) received from the main controller 110. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if an additional prize is generated and the variation pattern selected by the main control device 110 is different from the variation pattern assumed by the sound lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 The third symbol display device 81 can execute an effect corresponding to the content of the received variation pattern command.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the effect of the continuous effect is changed at the time when the additional winning is generated, but the V passable variation determining process is executed again at the time when the additional winning is generated, You may perform the process which correct | amends the production content of a continuous production based on the determination result. With such a configuration, when a big hit game can be executed via a small hit game, it is easy to execute a continuous presentation, and an effect that the player expects can be provided.

  In this embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A and the variation pattern (special variation B) selected when the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6 and the lottery result of the special symbol are small hits. The variation pattern (special variation C) selected when the number A is A and the number of reserved balls is 7 is different, but even if the same variation pattern is selected and an additional prize is generated, The determination result of the V passable variation determination process may not be affected. For example, the special variation B may be set so that the number of reserved balls is seven.

  By configuring in this way, even if an additional prize occurs during the continuous performance, the determination result of the V passable variation determination process calculated in advance and the result of the game actually performed are not different. There is an effect that an appropriate production can be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19A, the small hitting medium effect pattern selection table 222h will be described. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hitting / medium effect pattern selection table 222h. Here, the small hitting medium effect pattern selection table 222h is a table for selecting the contents of the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 during the small hitting game. The effect pattern (small hit effect pattern) during the small hit game is selected according to the presence / absence of the flag 223x or the continuous effect flag 223u and whether or not the current small hit game is V passable (V possible). It is prescribed as follows.

  Next, the precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the indication effect variation pattern selection table 222i. The precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i is a table that is referred to when the counter effect counter 223p is determined to be greater than 2, and includes the variation pattern command and the effect counter received from the main controller 110. Based on the value of 223g, a variation pattern that performs SW effect (prediction effect) or a variation pattern that does not perform SW effect is selected.

  When the variation pattern type received from the main control device 110 is equal to or shorter than the predetermined time (5000 milliseconds), the SW effect cannot be executed during the change (difficult), and therefore based on the value of the effect counter 223g. The variation pattern in which the presence / absence of the SW effect is selected is defined in advance only for the variation pattern whose variation time is longer than the predetermined time (5000 milliseconds).

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory 234a is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, the NAND flash memory 234a reads the instructions constituting the control program. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other Processing to read from the bank and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a and stored.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 73) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (S4001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the corresponding program.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (FIG. 75B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball inlet 64a is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 73).

  The fluctuation image at power-on will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. 81 (display of “◯” and “×” on the third symbol display device 81).

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged. If it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special effect”, the image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance 64a, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on is displayed. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235 b and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is directed against. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If a ball is detected at the first ball slot 64a while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 21, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back image and the back image will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the two types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 21B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 21A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a ′, and the position from the position a including the initial position is set. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation 22, the initial position of the rear surface B is immediately displayed in the third pattern display by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and the scroll display or color tone should not be changed over time. It is possible to display et al. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Meanwhile, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols, which are numbered from “0” to “9” as the third symbol, are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the first winning opening 64 is entered. The occurrence of such a state can be suppressed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of this normal symbol, the greater the chance that the ball will pass through the second entrance B640b, so there will be more opportunities to draw the normal symbol, and there will be more opportunities to win the normal symbol. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance B640b, and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, which can increase the player's willingness to participate in the game it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the first entrance 64a is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, so that the electric symbol is released as a big hit of the normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second winning prize. As it becomes easier to enter the mouth 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a sense of expectation that you can get a big jackpot of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  Also, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the reserved special symbol will be a big win of the special symbol, the player can make a special symbol in the special symbol lottery that is on hold. Therefore, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are displayed with respect to time. Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  The “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (FIG. 24) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode as described above, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. Can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines a presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. .

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined.

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (FIG. 24) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. To do.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. The main process (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (S4005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the transfer setting process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (S6405 in FIG. 88 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (S4301 in FIG. 75B), and the simple image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 75) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (S4309 of (b)) is performed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (FIGS. 76 to 85) and display setting processing (FIG. 86) are executed.

  In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (S6301 in FIG. 88A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (FIG. 88 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 89) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (FIG. 24) to be described later describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (FIG. 24) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (FIG. 24), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame To do.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (S4303 in FIG. 86). ), A pointer update process (S6005 in FIG. 86) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 24) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 24, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007 in FIG. 86). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (S1902 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S6513 in FIG. 89). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (S6514 in FIG. 89), The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (S6602 in FIG. 90).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (FIG. 75B) is executed (S6603 in FIG. 90).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, referring to FIG. 25, from when the ball passes through the entrance (the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b, or the second entrance B640b) until the jackpot game is executed. The flow of the game will be described. FIG. 25A is a timing chart showing a flow in which a big hit game is executed via a small hit game. FIG. 25A shows a pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is the small hit type A, and the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

  First, based on the ball entering the entrance (the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b, or the second entrance B640b), the main controller 110 changes the special symbol (special And a special symbol variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 (for example, variation time). 10 seconds).

  In addition, the V gate solenoid (V open solenoid) 650d2 for operating the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize winning device 650 to an open state or a closed state is always turned on and off at a constant timing after the power is turned on. It is controlled by the main controller 110. Here, the V-gate solenoid (V-open solenoid) 650d2 is set to ON so that the V-gate is in the guidance position (the position where the V-gate 650d is opened so that the sphere can pass through the V-discharge flow path 650e3). The V gate is configured to be positioned at a regulation position (a position where the V gate 650d is closed so as to make it difficult for the sphere to pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3).

  The V-gate solenoid (V-opening solenoid) 650d2 places the V-gate 650d at the induction position for a period t5 (1.5 seconds) after the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and then the period t6 (3.5 seconds). ) During which the V-gate 650d is positioned at the restricting position, that is, after the V-gate 650d is positioned at either the guide position or the restricting position, the period is one operation cycle. And the operation cycle is controlled to be repeatedly executed.

  When the symbol (identification information) indicating the small hit A is stopped as a result of the above-described special figure variation, the small hit A game is executed thereafter, and the display control device 114 displays the effect of the small hit A on the third symbol display device 81. Is done. The control contents of various devices executed during the small hit game are determined based on the small hit scenario selected with reference to the small hit scenario table 202g stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, In the small hit scenario a corresponding to the small hit A, when the small hit game is executed, the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to ON for the period t4 (4.5 seconds). When a period t1 (2.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the small hit game, the door solenoid (open solenoid) 650f2 for opening the door 650f of the second variable prize-winning device 650 is turned on for the period t2 (1.5 seconds). Set.

  At this timing, the second variable winning device 650 is in a state in which a ball can be won, and the ball that has won first depresses the flow path switching member 650b and stays by the stopper 650c. Then, the subsequent winning ball rolls on the upper surface of the flow path switching member 650b returned to the initial position, flows down the first flow path 650e1, and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 (see FIG. 4).

  When the period t2 (period in which the door solenoid (open solenoid) 650f2 is set to ON) elapses, the door solenoid (open solenoid) 650f2 is set to OFF during the period t3 (2 seconds), and the second variable prize winning device 650 is set. The ball is in a state where it is impossible (difficult) to win. Further, at the timing when the period t4 has elapsed, that is, at the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the end of the period t2, the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set off, and the stopper 650c is moved from the ball stop position to the ball stop release position (release). Position).

  It should be noted that the time (0.5 seconds) provided between the time when the door solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF and the time when the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF is set for the ball staying in the second variable winning device 650. 2 is set as a grace period for discharging to the outside of the variable winning device 650.

  When the stopper 650c moves to the release position, the ball that has stayed at the ball stop position (the ball that entered first) flows down toward the V gate 650d, and the flow down timing is that the V gate 650d is guided. At the (guide position) timing, the sphere passes a passage detection switch (specific region) 650e5 (described as V detection SW in FIG. 25) provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3, while the V gate 650d is regulated. At the timing of the state (restricted position), the upper surface of the V gate 650d rolls to flow down the second flow path and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 (see FIG. 4).

  When the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3 detects a ball (by passing through the specific area), the main control device 110 detects a big hit game after the small hit game ends. The specific door 65f of the first variable prize-winning device 65 is opened after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game, and the jackpot effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. .

  As described above, by operating various devices (the door 650f and the stopper 650c) at a predetermined timing during the small hit game, it is possible to allow only one ball to flow down toward the V gate at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute an appropriate game. In addition, since the operation control of various devices is executed based on one small hit scenario, it is less likely that an error occurs in the operation control timing between the devices than when the operation control is performed independently for each device. Therefore, the appropriate game can be executed more reliably.

  In addition, by using the above-described configuration, the timing at which the ball flows down on the V gate 650d after the small hit game is started is constant (in this embodiment, about five seconds after the small hit game is started). However, since the operation of the V gate 650d is always controlled at a constant cycle regardless of the game state, it is random whether or not the ball that won the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit game passes the specific area. be able to.

  Further, by configuring the operation timing of the V gate 650d to be grasped by the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine whether the current small hit game is a small hit game that can pass V.

  FIG. 25B is a timing chart showing a flow in which a jackpot game is executed based on a special symbol lottery. First, based on the ball entering the entrance (the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b, or the second entrance B640b), the main controller 110 changes the special symbol (special And a special symbol variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the special symbol change is finished and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the main control device 110 executes the jackpot game, and the first variable winning device 65 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the jackpot game was started. The specific door 65f is opened, and the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a jackpot effect.

  Note that the time from the start of the special figure variation shown in FIG. 25A until the jackpot game is executed and the time from the start of the special figure change shown in FIG. 25B to the execution of the jackpot game are shown. It is preferable to set the variation time of each special figure or the game time of the small hit game so that they are the same. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won a special jackpot in a special symbol lottery or whether the player has been awarded a jackpot as a result of the jackpot game. There is an effect that the production displayed on the screen can be enjoyed to the end.

  When the above-described configuration is employed, the second variable winning device 650 may be disposed at the lower center of the game board 13. In this way, it is not necessary to make a notification (so-called right-handed display) of the location where the game ball is to be fired on the third symbol display device 81 during the small hit game, and more special symbols are given to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether a jackpot is won in the lottery or whether a jackpot is awarded as a result of the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, the time from the start of the special figure variation shown in FIG. 25A until the jackpot game is executed and the time from the start of the special figure change shown in FIG. 25B until the jackpot game is executed. The same effect display may be executed on the third symbol display device 81. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to make it harder to grasp whether the player has won a jackpot in a special symbol lottery or whether the player has been awarded a jackpot as a result of the small hit game.

  Further, even when the V passing small winning is executed, if the second variable winning device 650 is not able to win the ball, no big winning is given. For example, in the third symbol display device 81 In the displayed effect display, until the process at the time of passing V for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a specific area in the V discharge channel 650e3 during the small hit game, the third symbol display device 81 If the same effect display is executed, and it is determined that the sphere has passed through a specific area in the V discharge flow path 650e3 as a result of the determination of the process at the time of passing V, the same effect display is continuously executed. Only when it is determined that a sphere has not passed through the specific area in the discharge flow path 650e3, processing for switching the content of the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result may be executed.

  By configuring in this way, in a normal game flow in which a ball is passed through a specific area during the execution of the V passing small hit, and the big hit is executed after the end of the small hit game, the third symbol display device Since there is no need to switch the contents of the effect display displayed at 81, there is an effect that the processing load of the effect display can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the indication effect will be described among the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10. FIGS. 26A and 26B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a sign effect. The sign effect is an effect that is executed when a stored ball whose stored result is a special symbol lottery A is continuously stored in the stored reserved ball. This is an effect for urging the player to save the reserved symbols up to the upper limit before the change based on the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A is executed.

  Here, the display screen (P) of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated using FIG. The display screen (P) of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, the upper side is the main display area Dm that displays the 3rd symbol in a variable manner, and the lower side is the secondary display that displays the number of reserved balls, etc. This is a region Ds.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows are displayed, and the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three display areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is a reserved ball that has not been changed among the balls that have entered the respective entrances (first entrance 64a, second entrance A64b, or second entrance B640b). A reserved symbol indicating the number of the symbols is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the reserved symbol of special figure 1 and the reserved symbol of special figure 2 are displayed in an indistinguishable (difficult) manner, but the reserved symbol of special figure 1 and the reserved symbol of special figure 2 are displayed. The display mode of the reserved symbols may be changed so that the player can identify them. Moreover, you may display another display body (mark) which can identify the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the vicinity of the reserved symbol, without changing the display mode of the reserved symbol. By doing in this way, the player can easily grasp whether the next fluctuation is Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2.

  In the small area Ds2, a changing symbol which is the same as the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol being changed is displayed. By configuring in this way, even when an effect that changes the mode of the reserved symbol (so-called hold notice effect) is adopted as an effect that suggests that the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol may be a big hit, It is possible to easily grasp the presence or absence of an on-hold notice effect for a special symbol that is changing.

  Therefore, it is possible to easily associate the hold notice effect performed in advance with the special symbol variation display, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player is interested in the effect. In addition, as the above-mentioned reserved notice effect, for example, an effect that changes the color of the reserved symbol (white → blue → red), an effect that changes the background effect of the reserved symbol (implied by the size of the flame), and the reserved symbol For example, an effect that allows the player to determine the likelihood of a big hit, such as an effect that makes characters appear.

  In the small area Ds3, a game description for the special symbol game in which the variable display is performed (“explanation indicating that the button is pressed”) and contents for informing the current game state are displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 26A, the description will be continued. In FIG. 26A, six reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1, and in the reserved symbols, the result of lottery of the special symbol is a small hit A (in FIG. 26A, (Shown as a star symbol) is continuously stored.

  In this state, that is, in the state where the reserved ball whose special symbol lottery result is the small hit A is continuously stored in the reserved ball, the sign effect can be executed, and the game is performed in the small area Ds3. The content prompting the user to operate the frame button 22 is displayed.

  Here, when the player operates the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 26B, the characters “a little more !!” are displayed in the small area Ds 3. This character is selected with reference to the precursor effect selection table 222d in the precursor fluctuation pattern selection process (S3403 in FIG. 67).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (b), the reserved symbols corresponding to the reserved ball whose special symbol lottery result is “A” is shown by an asterisk for ease of explanation. Actually, it is displayed as a reserved symbol in a display mode that cannot be distinguished from other reserved symbols (difficult). By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance for which reserved symbol the sign effect is being executed, and when the sign effect is executed, the player will always accumulate the number of reserved balls to the upper limit This makes it possible to increase the operation of the gaming machine.

  Moreover, you may change the mode of the holding | maintenance symbol displayed on the small area | region Ds1 to the display mode which suggests that the holding ball elected by the small hit A is continuously memorize | stored. In this case, the display mode of two consecutive reserved symbols may be changed to indicate the possibility that the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed has won the jackpot A. The display mode of the symbol has been changed, and in addition to the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed, either the reserved symbol that fluctuates before the reserved symbol or the reserved symbol that fluctuates after that has been won for small hit A You may comprise so that it may be a reserved symbol corresponding to a sphere.

  By configuring in this way, the player is eager to play the game to accumulate the reserved ball up to the upper limit before the change based on the specific reserved symbol (the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed) is started. It is possible to see the fluctuation effect based on the reserved symbol with a sense of superiority when the reserve ball is successfully stored up to the upper limit at the timing when the variation based on the specific reserved symbol is started. effective.

  The sign effect is configured to be executable up to a change before the change based on the reserved ball whose special symbol lottery result is a small hit A.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, a continuous effect will be described among the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous performance and the operation control of various devices.

  Here, the continuous production will be described. Continuous production means that a lottery result of a special symbol is continuously a small hit A, and among the consecutive small hits A, when a variation pattern corresponding to the first small hit A is selected, the holding ball Is an effect that is executed when a predetermined number (seven in this embodiment) is stored, and in a continuous small hitting A game, in the V discharge flow path 650e3 provided in the second variable winning device 650 This is an effect for highlighting a small hitting A game (hereinafter referred to as V passing small hits) through which a ball can pass through a specific region (passage detection switch 650e5).

  This continuous production includes at least a special symbol variation display corresponding to the first small hit A among consecutive small hits A (hereinafter referred to as a first special diagram variation display) and a first special diagram variation display. As a result, the small hitting A game (hereinafter referred to as the first small hitting A game) and the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the second small hitting A of the consecutive small hitting A (hereinafter referred to as the second small hitting A game) And the special display fluctuation display) and the effect display executed for the small hitting A game (hereinafter referred to as the second small hitting A game) executed as a result of the second special drawing fluctuation display. .

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the condition for executing the continuous performance is satisfied, the main controller 110 selects the special variation C (variation time 4 seconds) as the first special variation, and the special variation is selected. After the change of C stops, the first small hit A game is executed (6 seconds). Next, as the second special figure fluctuation, a special fluctuation B (fluctuation time of 5.5 seconds) is executed, and after the fluctuation of the special fluctuation B is stopped, the second small hit A game is executed.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, based on various commands set by the main control device 110, it corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display 1 corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation and the first small hit A game. The small hitting display 1, the special figure fluctuation display 2 corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation, and the second small hitting display 2 corresponding to the second small hit A game are displayed.

  On the other hand, the V gate 650d is changed to a guidance state (a state in which a sphere can pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3) for 1.5 seconds as an operation, and then to a regulated state (V discharge for 3.5 seconds). The operation of changing the sphere so as not to pass through the flow path 650e3 (difficult state) is defined as one cycle (5 seconds), and the cycle is repeatedly executed.

  Here, in the state where the continuous effect is executed, the winning ball V gate arrival timing (see FIG. 27), which is the timing at which the ball that won the second variable winning device 650 in the first small hitting A game reaches the V gate 650d. ) And the winning ball V gate arrival timing interval in the second small hitting A game is 11.5 seconds.

  This is the time from the winning ball V gate arrival timing to the end of the small hit A game in the first small hit A game (1 second), the variation time of the second special figure change (5.5 seconds), Of the second small hit A games, the total time is the time (5 seconds) from when the small hit game is executed until the winning ball V gate arrival timing.

  In this way, by setting the interval of the winning ball V gate arrival timing, it is possible to cause the ball to flow down at different timings with respect to the V gate 650d whose operation is controlled at a cycle of 5 seconds.

  More specifically, since one cycle of the V gate 650d is set to 5 seconds, the same operation state as the operation state of the V gate 650d corresponding to the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the first small hit A game However, 5 seconds later, 10 seconds later, and every 5 seconds from the timing of arrival of the winning ball V gate in the first small hit A game. In this embodiment, since the interval between the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the first small hit A game and the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the second small hit A game is 11.5 seconds, The winning ball V gate arrival timing in the winning A game is a timing that is delayed (different) by 1.5 seconds with respect to the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the first small hit A game.

  Here, the winning ball V gate arrival timing at which the player can be provided with an advantageous gaming state when the small hit A is continuously won will be described. In the present embodiment, the period during which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state is set to 1.5 seconds. That is, when the first and second winning ball V gate arrival timings differ by less than 1.5 seconds (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, the first and second winning prizes There is a high possibility that the V gate 650d is in the restricted state (3.5 seconds) in both the ball V gate arrival timing.

  Conversely, if the first and second winning ball V gate arrival timings differ by more than 1.5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds) from the operation period of the V gate 650d, the V gate 650d is in the induction state. There is a possibility of crossing periods.

  Therefore, by setting the first and second winning ball V gate arrival timings to be different from the operation period of the V gate 650d by the period (1.5 seconds) during which the V gate 650d is in the induction state, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the V gate 650d is in the restricted state in both the first and second winning ball V gate arrival timings without crossing the period in which the V gate 650d is in the guiding state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the V gate 650d is changed to the induction state (a state in which a sphere can pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3) for 1.5 seconds, and then for 3.5 seconds. In the meantime, the operation of changing to a regulated state (a state in which the sphere cannot pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3 (a difficult state)) is defined as one cycle (5 seconds), and the cycle is repeatedly executed. That is, the V gate 650d is configured to be in the inductive state for 1.5 seconds with an interval of 3.5 seconds. In other words, the V gate 650d is configured to be in a regulated state for 3.5 seconds with an interval of 1.5 seconds.

  In addition, in the small hit A game, the game time of the small hit game is set to 6 seconds, and the ball enters the V gate 650d at the timing when about 5.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small hit game. Designed to reach.

  Therefore, in the case where the reserved memory in which the special symbol lottery result is the small hit A is stored in a continuously variable display state (small hit A continuous executable state) in the special symbol held memory, Of the consecutive small hits A, the second special feature from the timing at which the ball won during the first small hit game reaches the V gate 650d (5.5 seconds after the start of the small hit game). If the time taken for the winning ball during the second small hit game to reach the V gate 650d is an integral multiple of the operation period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d through the fluctuation display, the continuous small hit A In any of the small hit games based on this, the ball reaches the V gate 650d at the timing when the V gate 650d performs the same operation.

  That is, if the total time of the game time of the small hit A game and the variation time of the special symbol is an integral multiple of the operation period of the V gate 650d, the V gate 650d operating at a predetermined operation period The ball will flow down at the same timing. In such a configuration, even if the player wins the small hit A continuously, there is no merit for the player, and the willingness to play is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game time (6 seconds) of the small hit game (the small hit A game) and the variation time (special variation B) of the second special figure variation display among the consecutive small hits A. : 5.5 seconds) so that the total time (11.5 seconds) does not become an integral multiple of the operation period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

  As a result, when a small hit game is continuously generated, the continuous small hit game does not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing with respect to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. That is, by continuously generating small hit games, it is possible to make the ball flow down at different timings with respect to the V gate 650d operating at a predetermined operation cycle. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a more advantageous gaming state when winning a small hit game continuously than when winning a small hit game alone. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation due to the performance.

  In this embodiment, the game time of the small hit A game (6 seconds) and the fluctuation time of the second special figure variation display (special fluctuation C: 5.5 seconds) of the consecutive small hits A The total time (11.5 seconds) differs from the time corresponding to an integral multiple of the operation period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d by a period (1.5 seconds) during which the V gate 650d is in the induction state. A special symbol variation time is set.

  This is set in order to increase the probability that a ball will flow down to the V gate at a timing when the V gate 650d is in the guiding state in any of the small hit games in the consecutive small hit games. That is, in the operation period of the V gate 650d, the time for the guidance state is 1.5 seconds, and the time for the regulation state is 3.5 seconds. When the total time of the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the latter of the hit A is less than 1.5 seconds with respect to the time corresponding to an integral multiple of the operation period of the V gate 650d, the former (first time ) And the latter (second) small hit game may be small hit games that can pass V. Thus, the overlap of the small hit games that can pass V in consecutive small hit games means that the former (first) small hit game and the latter (second) small hit game cannot pass V (difficult) This is because the possibility of becoming a small hit game increases accordingly.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the game time of the small hitting A game (6 seconds) and the fluctuation time of the second special figure variation display (special fluctuation B: 5.5 seconds) of the consecutive small hitting A A special symbol variation time is set so that the total time (11.5 seconds) differs from the time corresponding to an integral multiple of the operation period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d by 1.5 seconds. In the game, when the ball is caused to flow down to the V gate 650d in the first small hit game, when the V gate 650d is in a restricted state, the ball is caused to flow down to the V gate 650d in the second small hit game. The timing can increase the probability that the V gate 650d is in a guided state, and if the player wins the small hit game continuously, the game is more advantageous than the case where the small hit game is won alone. Provide state DOO becomes possible, there is an effect that a reduction of the gaming motivation due to the winning of small win in succession can be suppressed.

  The time for the difference is desirably 1.5 seconds or more with respect to an integral multiple of the operation period of the V gate 650d, but may be less than that. For example, when the operating period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d is different from the time (1.5 seconds) for which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state (for example, 1 second), More than two times (for example, five times), the operation period of the V gate 650d may be different by one round (5 seconds).

  By configuring in this way, for example, when the small hit game is continued five times, among the consecutive small hit games, a small hit game that can pass V is executed at least once. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state to a player when winning a small hit game continuously than when winning a small hit game alone.

  In the present embodiment, a period that is not an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state is set as the operation cycle. In this way, for example, the number of consecutive small hits is made more than 2 (for example, 5 times), and the total is made to differ by one cycle or more (7.5 seconds) of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. In the first period and the second period, the timing at which the ball flows down to the V gate 650d in the small hit game can be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous gaming state can be provided to the player.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the interval of the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the consecutive small hitting A game is set to a specific interval by setting the variation time of the special symbol to a specific variation time. In addition, for example, the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the first small hit A game may be different from the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the second small hit A game. Further, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d may be changed based on the continuous small hitting A game. Even if configured in this way, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the interval of the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the consecutive small hitting A game to a specific interval.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the continuous effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 28A is an example showing the first half of the special figure fluctuation display 1 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation in which the continuous effect is executed, and FIG. 28B shows the special figure fluctuation. FIG. 28C is an example showing the second half of the display 1 (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 28C shows the first half of the small hit display 1 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the first small hit A game in which the continuous performance is executed. It is an example which shows.

  FIG. 29A is an example showing the first half of the special figure fluctuation display 2 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation in which the continuous effect is executed, and FIG. 29B is a special figure fluctuation. FIG. 29C is an example showing the second half of the display 2 (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 29C is another example showing the second half of the special figure fluctuation display 2 (see FIG. 27).

  FIG. 30 (a) is an example showing the first half of the small hitting display 2 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the second small hitting A game in which the continuous performance is executed, and FIG. It is an example which shows the second half of the middle display 2 (refer FIG. 27).

  First, in (a) of FIG. 28, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 immediately after a continuous effect is performed is shown. When the continuous production is started, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the variable display area Dm1 provided on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and the free area of the main display area Dm (of the main display area Dm) An aspect (corresponding to the chance effect in FIG. 18B) indicating that the continuous effect has started is displayed in the region other than the variable display region Dm1.

  In the small area Ds1, seven reserved symbols are displayed, and the leftmost reserved symbol (the reserved symbol corresponding to the next change) is the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A (second time) The reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation) is displayed (star symbol), and the changing symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 (star symbol). For convenience of explanation, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A is displayed as a star symbol, but in actuality, it is a display mode that cannot be distinguished from other reserved symbols (difficult). It is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the second half of the special figure variation effect corresponding to the first special figure variation, a display indicating that both the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b are pressed is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the frame left button is displayed. A guidance display indicating the location of 22a and the frame right button 22b is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. Further, an aspect (corresponding to the chance effect in FIG. 18B) indicating that a continuous effect is being performed is displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 28B).

  The frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b provided on the pachinko machine 10 are arranged at an interval (500 millimeters) that is difficult to operate with one hand. It is necessary to release the hand from 51. This is because if a new winning (additional winning) occurs during the continuous performance, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special figure variation received from the main control device 110 is passed through the V of the audio lamp control device 113. This is an effect for preventing an additional prize from being generated because it differs from the variation time of the second special figure variation referred to in the possible variation determination process.

  After the left and right frame buttons 22 (the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b) are operated at the same time, when the first small hit A game is started, the continuous effect continues in the main display area Dm in the small hit medium effect. As a continuous display indicating that the action is to be performed, “another time!” (Corresponding to the chance effect in FIG. 19A) is displayed (FIG. 28C). In this state, the symbol “757” indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit in the variable display area Dm1 is stopped and displayed. In addition, “right-handed” indicating that the gaming state is aimed at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed in the small area Ds3.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (c), the small hits that are being continuously produced and are not determined to be V-passable are highlighted and displayed for notifying the player that the continuous production will continue. Therefore, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that a small hit game has occurred.

  In addition, by notifying the player that the continuous performance will continue, even if this small hit game is a small hit game in which V passing is impossible (difficult), the player can play the small hit game from the next time onwards. Since attention will be paid, there is an effect that dissatisfaction due to occurrence of a small hit game that cannot pass V (difficult) can be reduced.

  Then, the second special figure change is started. First, the case where the second special figure fluctuation is the special figure fluctuation determined as the V-passable fluctuation in the V-passable fluctuation determination process will be described. When the second special map change is started, as shown in FIG. 29A, a display indicating that either the frame left button 22a or the frame right button 22b is to be pressed (excess of FIG. 18B) is displayed. Corresponding to the chance effect) and a guidance display for guiding the position of the frame button is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. In this state, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is varied in the variation display area Dm1, and six reserved symbols are displayed in the small region Ds1. Then, in the small area Ds2, a changing symbol indicating the second special figure change is displayed, and in the small area Ds3, “during continuous effect” is displayed.

  The display indicating that a continuous effect is being displayed in the small area Ds3 is configured so that the display mode changes so as to suggest that the current fluctuation is a V-passable fluctuation. By changing the color of the comment, the color of the back surface on which the comment is displayed, etc., it is possible to indicate to the player that the current fluctuation is a V-passable fluctuation. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to play the game while predicting when the fluctuation corresponding to the V passable fluctuation will come, and the situation where the player gets bored early with the performance of the pachinko machine 10 is suppressed. There is an effect that can be done.

  In addition, after the variation display determined to be the V-passable variation starts (after the variation display variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the V-passable variation is determined), a new winning (additional winning) occurs. However, since the variation pattern is not changed, a normal mode other than the operation effect of the frame button 22 using both hands is executed.

  When a special symbol is stopped and displayed after the player has operated any of the frame buttons 22, it is suggested that the small hit provided this time in the main display area Dm is a small hit that allows V to pass. “Inrush” (corresponding to the super chance effect in FIG. 18B) is displayed (FIG. 29B). In this state, the symbol “757” indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit in the variable display area Dm1 is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the display screen displayed in FIG. 29C is a display screen when the second special figure change is stopped and displayed when an additional prize is generated during the first special figure change. If the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) assumed in advance is different from the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) actually received from the main control device 110 due to the occurrence of the additional winning as described above, the current fluctuation passes through V. The main display (corresponding to the throbbing effect in FIG. 18B) in which the degree of expectation indicating whether or not the fluctuation is possible is unknown is used. It should be noted that this display screen is a variation that can pass V, for example, when the player does not operate the frame button 22 or when the player does not operate the frame button 22, or when the variation other than the final variation of the continuous performance is V. It is configured to be displayed even when a big hit is not given in the small hit game won in the passable fluctuation and the remaining fluctuation is started.

  By using such a display screen, it is possible to execute a series of effects having relevance to a plurality of fluctuations even when an additional prize is generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect display that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

  Next, after the screen of FIG. 29 (b) is displayed, if a V passable small hit is executed, it is emphasized that V can pass through the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 30 (a). “V Aim for V !!”, which is a V pass highlighting display (corresponding to the super-chance effect in FIG. 19A), and guides the position of the second variable winning device 650 in the guidance display area Dm2. A guidance display is displayed.

  In addition, in the small area Ds3, “Super Chance” indicating that a continuous production is being performed is displayed, and “Right-handed” indicating that the gaming state is aimed at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, as a display indicating that a continuous production is being performed, “continuous production” (FIG. 28B), “chance” (FIG. 29A), “super chance” (FIG. 28). 30 (a)) is displayed, which is executed whether or not the current special symbol variation is a V-passable variation or after the special symbol variation stops. It is set so as to suggest the degree of expectation indicating whether or not the small hit A game is a small passable V hit. Therefore, if the first special figure fluctuation is a V passable fluctuation during the continuous performance, the message “super chance” may be displayed suddenly.

  Finally, when the ball passes through the V discharge flow path 650e3 which is a specific area in the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the big hit is given, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the main display area A display indicating that a jackpot has occurred at Dm is made, and a guidance display for guiding the position of the first variable winning device 65 opened during the jackpot game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2.

  As described above, in the continuous production in the pachinko machine 10, the small hit game corresponding to the second special figure change from the start of the first special figure change (see the special figure change display 1 (see FIG. 27A)) ( Since it is executed as a series of effects related to the execution of the small hit game based on the small hit display 2 (see FIG. 28 (a)), the same effect in the first small hit and the second small hit The display is not executed, but the continuous highlight display is executed to emphasize that the continuous performance continues at the first small hit, and the second small hit is emphasized that the V hit is a passable V hit. Since the highlighting is executed, it is possible to make the player recognize two consecutive small hit games as one continuous game, and a small hit game that cannot pass V (is difficult) is executed. Reduced player's willingness to play It is possible to suppress.

  If an additional prize occurs between the start of the first special figure change and the start of the second special figure change, the second special figure change pattern (change time) However, since it differs from the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) assumed in advance, the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the small hit game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation assumed in advance and the actual second time There is a problem that the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the small hit game corresponding to the special figure variation of the game is different, and a satisfactory continuous performance cannot be executed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to generate an additional winning of a ball in a predetermined period (a period from the start of the first special figure change until the second special figure change is started). As an additional prize prevention effect, an operation effect (see FIG. 29B) of the frame button 22 (the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b) using both hands is executed. By executing such an effect, the player releases his hand from the operation handle 51, so that it is possible to reduce the number of balls fired during that period, and as a result, the occurrence of additional winnings in a predetermined period is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

  In this embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-described additional winning, an effect using the frame button 22 for causing the player to interrupt the game once is executed. However, the player interrupts the game. As long as it is an effect, other effects may be used or the third symbol display device 81 may display that the ball is to be stopped.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the additional winning occurs, the display content of the continuous effect is changed. For example, based on the occurrence of the additional winning, the small hit game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation is performed. The winning ball V gate arrival timing is calculated anew, and based on the calculation result, the effect display corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation (special figure fluctuation display 2 (see FIG. 27)) and the second special figure fluctuation are based. The contents of the effect display corresponding to the small hit game (the small hit medium display 2 (see FIG. 27)) may be reset. In this way, even when an additional prize is generated, a continuous effect can be executed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, special variation B to special variation C are defined for each number of reserved balls as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol used during the continuous production (see FIG. 13). Even if the numbers are different, it may be specified that the same variation pattern is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, the variation pattern selected when the number of reserved balls is 7 and the variation pattern selected when the number of retained balls is 6 are set to the same variation pattern (for example, special variation B). Thus, even if an additional prize is generated during the continuous performance and the second special figure variation is executed with the hold 7, the variation pattern does not differ. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute a preset continuous effect.

  In the present embodiment, whether the special figure fluctuation (small hit game) during the continuous performance is executing the chance production (the production suggesting that the possibility of a big hit based on the fluctuation is low) is a super chance. Although it is configured to be able to notify a player whether or not an effect (an effect that suggests that the probability of winning a big hit based on the change) is being executed, for example, a continuous effect for the player It is a display mode that informs that it is being executed, and it is difficult to grasp whether the current special figure fluctuation (small hit game) is executing a chance effect or a super-chance effect A display mode may be used. In this way, the player can have an expectation for multiple special figure changes that are executed until the end of the continuous performance, so that the situation of getting bored early in the game is suppressed. There is an effect that can be done.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that a continuous effect may be performed when V passable fluctuation | variation is determined by the V passable fluctuation | variation determination process, it is not restricted to this but is not determined as V passable fluctuation | variation. Alternatively, the continuous effect may be executed on condition that the small hits A are continuous. Further, when the small hit A and other small hits (small hit B or small hit C) are continuous, the continuous effect may be executed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise the frequency which performs a continuous production, and there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the above-described continuous effect is executed when the special symbol winning information is held and stored so that the small hits A are continuously executed. In some cases, a continuous effect may be executed. For example, a continuous effect may be executed even when a plurality of winning prizes A stored in reserve are stored in a sequence in which the small hits A are not continuously executed. . When configured in this way, the special symbol variation time and the hit game when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is not the small hit A (when the result of the determination is wrong or the small hit other than the small hit A). The time (small hit game time) can be calculated in advance, and if it is determined that the small hit A stored on hold is a V pass small hit, a continuous effect may be executed.

  Further, as described above, in the case where the continuous effect is executed including the case where the special symbol success / failure determination result is not the small hit A, the fluctuation time specified when the special symbol determination result is small hit A and The total time of the game time of the small hit A is set to be the same as the variation time specified when the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct, and the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is determined to be small hit A If the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is a small hit other than the small hit A, the variable time and the small hit A other than the small hit A It is good to set so that time which added game time becomes the same.

  By doing this, regardless of the special symbol success / failure determination result, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol until the start of the next special symbol change, that is, the special symbol's success / failure determination result is off. In the case of, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol until the symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol is out of display is stopped, and the determination result of the special symbol is smaller than the small hit A. In the case of winning, from the start of the change of the special symbol until the end of the small hit game that is executed after the symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol is a small hit other than the small hit A is stopped Since the period can be unified, it is possible to reduce the determination process of whether or not the condition for executing the continuous performance is satisfied.

  Further, in the first embodiment, there is one type of small hit determined to be V passable small hits (small hit A), but a plurality of types of small hits determined to be V passable small hits are provided. In some cases, the above-described continuous performance may be executed. For example, as a type of small hits determined to be V passable small hits, small hits A1 (as big hits set at the time of passing V, no 8R time shortening) and small hits A2 (as big hits set at the time of passing V as 10R short time) 8 times).

  Then, in the winning information stored on hold, the small hit A1 that can pass V is stored as the winning information that is executed first, and the winning information that is executed later is in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit A1 If a small hit A2 that is executed at a timing at which V can be passed if V is not passed through is stored, the player is informed that the ball will not pass V during the small hit game corresponding to the small hit A1. Run.

  By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of small hit types different in the privilege (big hit type) given by passing the ball through the V during the small hit game, a small advantage that is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to guide the vehicle to pass V at the hit. In the above-described example, an example is shown in which a guidance effect for passing V at a small hit that is more advantageous to the player among a plurality of small hit types is displayed. It may be configured to notify only that there are a plurality of small hits that can pass V in the information. Accordingly, the player determines the small hit game to pass the ball through V by himself / herself and plays the game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the continuous jackpot effect will be described among the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous jackpot presentation and the operation control of various devices.

  Here, the continuous jackpot production will be described. The continuous jackpot effect is the timing at which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the small hit A game when the small hit A is won in the change of the special symbol in the first rotation after the big hit ends. And the timing at which the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize-winning device 650 enters the inductive state is calculated in advance, and the timing at which the change of the special symbol of the first rotation after the big hit ends, that is, the big hit game is It is determined whether the end timing is the timing at which the small hit A game in the first rotation after the end of the big hit can pass through the passage detection switch 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3, which is a specific area, and based on the determination result Is to determine.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot effect is satisfied, main controller 110 executes special variation A as the variation pattern of the special drawing variation for the first rotation after the end of the jackpot (FIG. 13). Next, a small hit A game is executed.

  Further, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot effect is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 has a passage detection switch in the V discharge flow path 650e3 in which the small hit A game of the first rotation after the big hit ends is a specific region. An effect display (final round effect display) based on the timing at which the ball can pass at 650e5 is executed in the final round of the jackpot game. Then, the ending effect display of the jackpot game is executed based on the game result of the last round. Next, special figure fluctuation display and small hitting / medium effect display are executed based on various commands set by main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the V gate 650d is changed to a guiding state (a state in which a ball can pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3) for 1.5 seconds as an operation even during the jackpot game, and then regulated for 3.5 seconds. The operation that changes the state (a state in which the sphere cannot pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3 (a difficult state)) is defined as one cycle (5 seconds), and the cycle is repeatedly executed.

  Here, the jackpot end timing for making the jackpot game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot end to be a jackpot that can pass V will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot effect is satisfied, the special figure variation for the first rotation after the big jackpot is finished is executed, and then the small hit based on the special figure variation is executed. In the game, the time until the winning ball V gate arrival timing, which is the timing at which the ball that won the second variable winning device 650 reaches the V gate 650d, is set to 35 seconds (special variation A: 30 seconds + small hit game) 5 seconds from when the winning ball is executed until the winning ball reaches the V gate).

  In addition, the ending period of the jackpot game is fixed to 5 seconds (see FIG. 14). In other words, the winning ball V gate arrival timing comes 40 seconds after the final round of the jackpot game ends. Therefore, if the operation state of the V gate 650d at the timing when the final round of the jackpot game is finished is the timing when the V gate 650d is in the inductive state after 40 seconds, the small hit based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot ends. The game can be a small hit that can pass V.

  That is, in this embodiment, since the V gate 650d repeatedly executes a constant operation control at a cycle of 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 31, if the V gate 650d is in the induction state at the final round end timing of the jackpot game, The small hit game based on the change in the special figure in the first rotation after the big hit ends can be a small hit game that can pass V.

  The final round end timing of the jackpot game means that when the final round is over time (30 seconds have elapsed), or in the final round, a predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) are won in the first variable winning device 65. The timing of the case. Specifically, in the case of a normal game, the ball is designed so that a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of balls is won in the first variable winning device 65 before the time is over. Thus, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the tenth winning in the final round of the jackpot game is the final round end timing of the jackpot game.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32. Of the effect displays displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the final round effect display displayed corresponding to the last round of the jackpot game includes a plurality of effects. A selection object (for example, fortune) is displayed, a selection part (for example, a cursor) for switching the selection object at a predetermined interval (for example, 1.5 second interval) is displayed, and the final round end timing of the jackpot game is a jackpot If it is the timing at which the small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation in the first rotation after the end can be made a small hit that can pass V, that effect is displayed using the ending time of the big hit game. .

  In this embodiment, since the operation period of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds and the final round of the jackpot game is set to 30 seconds at the longest, the final round end timing is ended during the game of the final round. It is possible to set the timing at which the small hit based on the special drawing fluctuation in the first rotation becomes the small hit that can pass V a plurality of times. Therefore, even if the proportion of balls that are fired during the jackpot game is different in the first variable winning device 65 (even if it is easy or difficult to enter the first variable winning device 65), the consecutive jackpot effect There is an effect that you can enjoy.

  Furthermore, since the final round end timing is determined by winning a predetermined number of balls launched by the player in the first variable winning device 65, for example, after the jackpot game ending period as a continuous jackpot effect, When a display indicating that the small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation is a small hit that can pass V is a game state advantageous to the player by herself (small hit that can pass V) It becomes possible to grasp that has been acquired. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the result of the game on its own, so that it is possible to actively participate in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the result of the continuous jackpot effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. For example, the winning sound when the ball at the final round end timing wins the first variable winning device 65 It may be configured to notify the player by changing. With this configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that the player notices but does not notice the people around him.

  In the present embodiment, since the V gate 650d is always driven after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the small hit game based on the special figure change of the first rotation after the big hit ends in the final round period of the big hit game. Since it is possible to make uncertain when the timing for making a small hit that allows V to pass, it is possible to prevent the player from being attacked and to provide a player with fair gameplay There is an effect that can be.

  It should be noted that during the jackpot gaming state in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened, it is preferable that the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650 is not visually recognized (difficult) by the player. With this configuration, the jackpot game is performed while the player understands the operation status of the V gate 650d in the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game in which the above-described continuous jackpot effect is executed. Can be prevented, and it is possible to provide a player with fair game play.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 33, the continuous jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 32 (a) is a display screen of the last round (9 rounds) before the last round (10 rounds) in the jackpot game, or the effect before the last round executed in the subsequent interval period (see FIG. 31). FIG. 32B is an example showing a display screen in the first half of the final round effect (see FIG. 31) executed during the final round in the jackpot game.

  FIG. 33 (a) is an example showing a display screen in the latter half of the final round effect (see FIG. 31) executed during the final round in the jackpot game. FIGS. 33 (b) to 33 (c) are jackpots. It is an example which shows the display screen of the ending effect display (refer FIG. 31) performed in the ending period in a game.

  First, in FIG. 32 (a), in the final round (10th round), a prior notification display for notifying that the fortune game that is a continuous jackpot effect starts is displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a comment explaining the contents of the fortune game that is a continuous big hit effect is displayed in the small area Ds2. In the small area Ds3, “right-handed” indicating that the gaming state is aimed at the first variable winning device 65 is displayed. This display is displayed in the interval period between the 9th and 10th rounds (final round) from the middle of the 9th round.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the last round (10 rounds) is reached, three fortune tickets Dm4 are displayed in the main display area, and a selection cursor Dm3 indicating each of the fortune tickets in turn is displayed at a predetermined interval (1. 5 seconds), a moving display that moves to the right is performed. In the small area Ds1, the number of winnings (10) and the number of winning balls (7), which are conditions for closing the attacker (the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65), are displayed. In the small area Ds2, the winning area is displayed. When the ball reaches 10, the attacker closes, that is, an explanation that the fortune is decided, and a comment that explains that the winning ball is counted in the small area Ds1 is displayed.

  The plurality of fortune tickets Dm4 displayed in the main display area Dm have different display modes, and are configured so that comments having different contents are displayed depending on the selected fortune ticket. Then, the selection cursor is selected at a timing that satisfies an end condition (when the number of winning balls exceeds 10 or when a predetermined time (30 seconds) is reached) in which the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. Dm3 stops, and the fortune lot indicated by the stopped selection cursor Dm3 is enlarged (FIG. 33 (a)). In this state, the number of winning balls is displayed as 10 in the small area Ds1, and an explanatory comment indicating that the fortune lot Dm4 has been determined is displayed in the small area Ds2.

  Then, at the ending period of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 33 (b) or FIG. 33 (c), the contents of the selected fortune lot Dm4 are displayed and performed on the current day using the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2. The results of past fortune games are displayed. In FIG. 33B, “Super-good” is displayed as a result of the fortune game, and in FIG. 33C, “Daiyoshi” is displayed as a result of the fortune game.

  As a result of the Omikuji game, there are “Kichikichi”, “Daikichi”, “Nakakichi”, and “Kokikichi”. It is selected when the jackpot game ends at the timing and there is a special symbol jackpot in the subsequent holding balls, and “Daikichi” allows the first variation of the jackpot game to pass V after the jackpot ends It is selected when the jackpot game ends at the timing, and “Nakakichi” and “Kokichi” are when the jackpot game of the first variation after the jackpot ends is V passing impossible (difficult) timing When “Nakakichi” is selected, a privilege (a gift of music or an image) that does not directly affect the game is given.

  In this way, by displaying the past history, even if no continuous jackpot is provided as a result of this continuous jackpot presentation, if there is “super good” or “daikichi” in the past history, the next consecutive jackpot presentation Even if there is no “super-yoshi” or “daikichi” in the past history, if the end timing of the jackpot game is intentionally slightly changed, it will become “super-yoshi” or “daikichi” Thus, there is an effect that the player can play the game eagerly.

  When such a continuous jackpot effect is executed, the player visually recognizes the inside of the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot, that is, while playing a game in which the first variable winning device 65 wins a ball. It is better not to do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to capture the final round while grasping the open / close state of the gate and gradually adjust the timing. In such a case, the lamp member provided in the second variable winning device 650 is formed only when the cover member of the second variable winning device 650 is formed with a half mirror and a game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is performed. It is preferable to use a configuration in which the (light emitting means) emits light so that the inside is visible.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 34 to 54. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup Processing and main processing will be described.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (398 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized. When the values (399, 99, 99, 398, and 398 in this embodiment) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 (counter buffer 203i).

  Next, it is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern (variation time) of the third symbol that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed (S104), and then a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b, or the second entrance B640b (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38 and FIGS. 39 to 42.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 7), is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is used. A through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the sphere is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the through-gate passing process is executed, a firing control process is executed (S108), and further, a door passing process (S109), a V passing process (S110), and a V gate drive control process (S111) are executed. Details of the door passage process (S109), the V passage process (S110), and the V gate drive control process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the processing of S111 is completed, other processing that should be periodically executed is then executed (S112), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of times of holding N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 is 0 and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: Yes) ) Since there is no holding ball for starting the variable display, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that either one of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: No), then A variation execution determination process is executed to determine which special symbol to start the variation based on (S205). By executing the fluctuation execution determination process (S205), a fluctuation execution flag 203j indicating a special symbol for starting fluctuation is set. Details of the variation execution determination process (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S205 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the fluctuation is executed in FIG. 1 (S206). In the process of S206, it is determined whether the variable execution flag 203j set by the variable execution determination process (S205) indicates variable execution in FIG. 1 (S206). In the process of S206, when it is determined that the variable execution flag 203j indicates the variable execution in FIG. 1 (S206: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S207 to execute the fluctuation in FIG. .

  In the process of S207, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S207), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set. (S208). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 50) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). In the process of S209, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation start processing is executed for the variation of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the variation of the special symbol based on the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that the variable execution flag 203j is not variable execution in FIG. 1 (S206: No), this is the case where the variable execution flag 203j is variable execution in FIG. In order to execute the fluctuation of FIG. 2, the process proceeds to S210. In the processing of S210 to S212, the same processing as the processing for the holding ball of the special symbol 1 (the processing of S207 to S209) is performed for the holding ball of the special symbol 2.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S210), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S211). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212), and the special symbol for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is started. A variation start process is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If S has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (not shown), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, among the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the variation execution determination process (FIG. The stop symbol of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is set based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area in S205 of 36. More specifically, when the special symbol 1 is a big hit, whether the big hit A or the big hit B is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 is a big hit, whether the big hit A or the big hit B is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display (this lottery this time) performed by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) is started. It is determined whether the result is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set using the jackpot scenario table 202f (see FIG. 14A) (S217).

  Specifically, if the current lottery result is a jackpot A, the jackpot scenario a202f1 (see FIG. 14B) is set, and if the lottery result is a jackpot B, the jackpot scenario b202f2 (see FIG. 14C). ) Is set.

  When the process of S217 is completed, the time reduction / medium counter 203h is set to 0 (initialized) (S218), and the process proceeds to S223.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S216: No), it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is a special symbol small hit (S219). In the process of S219, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a special symbol small hit, the small hit start setting process is executed to start the small hit (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. . Details of the small hit start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S219, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a special symbol small hit (S219: No), since the current lottery result is out of the special symbol, the process directly proceeds to the process of S221.

  In the process of S221, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is greater than 0 (S221), and when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S221: Yes), The value of the hour / middle counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is not 1 or more (0) (S220: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223.

  In the process of S223 executed after the process of S218, S221, or S222, the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S215, and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. A stop command is set in order to synchronize the fluctuation stop of (S223).

  Next, the variation execution determination process (S205) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S205). This variation execution determination process (S205) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34). The first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is displayed. This is a process for determining whether to execute based on the order of change stored in the change order storage area 203k.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting 0 to the variation execution flag 203j (S301), and then data in the variation order storage area 203k is acquired (S302). Then, the data in the change order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → first The data in each area is shifted, such as 5 areas, 7th area → 6th area, 8th area → 7th area. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k is the special figure 1 (1) (S304).

  If it is determined in the process of S304 that the execution area data is special figure 1 (1) (S304: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to variable execution (1) in special figure 1 (S305). ), This process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution area data is not the special figure 1 (1) (S304: No), the execution area data is the special figure 2 (2). Is set to change execution (S306), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol change process.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is stored in the special symbol reservation ball execution area. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired and stored in the execution area in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S401). Next, the data stored in the execution area in the special symbol holding storage area that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the process of S401 is acquired (S402). Specifically, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 of special symbols is acquired.

  When the process of S402 is completed, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a corresponding to the special symbol type acquired in the process of S402 (S403). More specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S402 is compared with the jackpot determination value stored in the first hit random number table 202a, and the lottery result is acquired. As described above, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, a big win lottery result is obtained, and when “1 to 398” is selected, a small win is selected as a lottery result other than the big win (out). In the case of “399”, the lottery result is out of place (see FIG. 10A).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S403 is a big hit (S404). In the process of S404, when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S404: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (S405).

  More specifically, referring to the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S402, and comparing with the random value defined in the first big hit type selection table 202b, the big hit of four types of special symbols Of the types (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the big hit A (a big hit with 2R time shortening) is set, and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, the big hit B (5R time is short and big hit) is set (see FIG. 10B). Of the four types of jackpot types, jackpot C and jackpot D are set when the game ball passes through a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) provided in the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit game. A jackpot type is assigned to each jackpot type described later (see FIG. 11A).

  In the process of S405, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the set jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  When the process of S405 is completed, the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 (FIG. 12 (FIG. 12)) is based on the current gaming state (whether or not there is a short time), the number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401. The jackpot variation pattern is determined with reference to a) (S406), and the process proceeds to S412.

  When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S406, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S404 that the lottery result is not a big win (S404: No), it is then determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S407). In the process of S407, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S407: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the small hit type is set (S408), and the current gaming state and the hold A small hit variation pattern is determined based on the number of balls and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 (S409), and the process proceeds to S412.

  In the process of S407, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S407: No), since the lottery result is a failure, a disabling display mode corresponding to the special symbol is set (S410).

  In the process of S410, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area. The stop type to be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 is determined.

  When the process of S410 is completed, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 (S411), and the process proceeds to S412.

  In the processing of S411, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  The relationship between each lottery result, the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 12A to 12B and FIG. 13).

  When the processing of S406, S409, or S411 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S406, S409, or S411 is set (S412). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S405, S408, or S410 is set (S413). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 50). The When the processing of S413 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the small hitting start setting process (S220) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this small hitting start setting process (S220). This small hit start setting process (S220) is a process for setting the start of the small hit game, which is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35).

  Here, when the small hit game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the second variable winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can be won (easy), and the ball that won the second variable winning device 650 By passing through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5), the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

  That is, the game state in which the small hit game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won (a prize ball can be obtained) in the second variable winning device 650, and a big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where there is a high possibility that

  Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the small hit start setting process (S220), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit A (S501). In the process of S501, when it is determined that the small hit A is (S501: Yes), the small hit scenario a corresponding to the small hit type (small hit A) is set using the small hit scenario table 202g ( S502).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that it is not the small hit A (S501: No), the small hit scenario b corresponding to the small hit type (small hit B, C) is selected using the small hit scenario table 202g. Setting is made (S503).

  When the processing of S502 or S503 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit C (S504). In the process of S504, when it is determined that the jackpot C is (S504: Yes), the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type at the time of passing V (S505), and this process ends.

  on the other hand. In the process of S504, when it is determined that it is not the small hit C (S504: No), the big hit D is set as the big hit type at the time of passing V (S506), and this process ends.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 34) and enters the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b, or the second entrance B640b (start). If there is a start winning, the preserving process of the values indicated by the various random number counters and the lottery result of each special symbol are pre-read from the values indicated by the various random number counters held. Process.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b, or the second entrance B640b (S601). . Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b, or the second entrance B640b is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b, or the second entrance B640b (S601: No), the process related to the start winning is executed. Since there is no need, this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b, or the second entrance B640b (S601: Yes), the process related to the start winning prize In order to execute the process, the process proceeds to S602.

  In the process of S602, the special figure 1 start winning process is executed in order to perform a process based on the entrance to the first entrance 64a (S602). Details of the special figure 1 start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S602 is completed, a special figure 2 start winning process is executed in order to perform a process based on the entry to the second entrance A64b or the second entrance B640b (S603). Details of the special figure 2 start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S603 is completed, a prefetch process is executed in order to prefetch the lottery result of each special symbol (S604), and this process is terminated. Details of the prefetch process (S604) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special figure 1 start winning process (S602) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 start winning process (S602). This special figure 1 start winning process (S602) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 34), and it is determined whether or not there is a start (start winning) at the first entrance 64a. This is a process for executing the holding of the values indicated by the various random number counters when there is a case.

  In the special figure 1 start winning process (S602), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first entrance 64a (S701). In the process of S701, when it is determined that no game ball has entered the first entrance 64a (S701: No), it is not necessary to execute the process related to the start winning of the first special symbol. This process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S701 that a game ball has entered the first entrance 64a (S701: Yes), then the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variation display in the special symbol) (N702) is acquired (S702). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d is less than an upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  In the process of S703, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit value (S703: No), there is a ball entering the first ball inlet 64a. This is a case where the number of reserved balls is the upper limit. In this case, this process is ended as it is without executing the process related to the start winning of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, if there is a ball entering the first ball inlet 64a (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 The value (N1) of the reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S705).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 50) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure 1 reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number in the RAM 223. Store in the counter 223b.

  After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S705, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hits updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. The value of the type counter C5 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S706), special figure 1 is set in the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203k (S707), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S707, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is designated. If the value is 3, the third area is designated. If the value is 4, the fourth area is designated. If the value is 5, the fifth area is designated. If the value is 6, the sixth area is the first area, and if the value is 7, the seventh area is the first area. By determining the value set in the change order storage area 203k in the change execution determination process (S205) described above, the entrance (starting opening) changes the special symbol 1 as in this embodiment. Even when there are two types of fluctuations, such as those that cause the special symbol 2 to fluctuate, the fluctuation can be started in the order of winning in the entrance (starting opening).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special figure 2 start winning process (S603) performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 start winning process (S603). This special figure 2 start winning process (S603) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 34), and whether or not there is a start (start winning) at the second entrance A64b or the second entrance B640b. This is a process for holding the values indicated by the various random number counters when there is a start winning.

  In the special figure 2 start winning process (S603), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance A64b (start winning prize) (S801). If it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance A64b (S801: Yes), the process proceeds to S805 in order to perform the same process as the first special symbol on the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S801 that the ball has not entered the second entrance A64b (S801: No), then the ball enters the second entrance B640b (starting prize). It is determined whether or not it has been done (S802). If it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance B640b (S802: Yes), the process proceeds to S803 in order to determine whether the ball has entered the normal second entrance B640b. To do.

  In the process of S803, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is on (S803). When it is determined that the special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is on (S803: Yes), the entry into the second entrance B640b is valid during the period set as valid (normal). Therefore, the process proceeds to S805 in order to perform the same process as the first special symbol for the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S803 that the special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is off (S803: No), the entry to the second entrance B640b is not valid (abnormal). Since the error command is set (S804), the process proceeds to S805.

  The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) described later executed by the MPU 201, the error command is sent. It is transmitted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the error content from the error command, and makes a notification based on the extracted content, the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. And run with

  In the process of S805, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S805). Next, if the value is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S806: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S807), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball A special figure 2 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the number counter 203e is set (S808). Then, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selecting counter C3, and the small hitting type counter C5 and the winning slot type are stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b (S809), and changed. Special figure 2 is stored (set) in the first area of sequential storage area 203k (S810), and this process ends. Note that the determination of the first area in S810 is performed in the same manner as the processing in S707.

  There is no entry to the second entrance A64b and the second entrance B640b (S802: No), or even if there is an entrance to the second entrance A64b or the second entrance B640b If the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S806: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the prefetch process (S604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S604). This pre-reading process (S604) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 39), is a process for determining in advance the lottery result of each special symbol and setting a winning information command based on the prior determination result. .

  In the prefetch process (S604), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entrance 64a (start winning prize) (S901). In the process of S901, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64a (start winning prize) (S901: Yes), the first hit random number table 202a, the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and the special figure Based on the 1-type selection table 202c1, a prior determination result (a winning determination result, a big hit type, a small win type) is acquired (S902).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S901 that the ball has not entered the first entrance 64a (the ball has entered the second entrance A64b or the second entrance B640b (starting prize)). (S901: No), a prior determination result (a winning determination result, a big hit type, a small hit type) is acquired based on the first random number table 202a, the first big hit type selection table 202b, and the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2. (S903).

  When the processing of S902 or S903 is completed, a winning information command is set based on the prior determination result (winning determination result, big hit type, small hit type) acquired in the processing of S902 or S903 (S904). The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 50) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it extracts a pre-determination result (winning determination result, jackpot type, small jackpot type) from the winning information command, and the extracted value is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Store. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the preliminary determination result.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the second symbol variation display and second incoming ball performed in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 7). This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance B640b of the device 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), it is first determined whether or not the value of the effective period measurement counter 203s is 1 or more (S1001). In the process of S1001, when it is determined that the value of the effective period measurement counter 203s is 1 or more, the value of the effective period measurement counter 203s is used to measure the possible entry period to the second entrance B640b. 1 is subtracted (S1002), and the process proceeds to S1003.

  In the process of S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the valid period measurement counter 203s is 0 (S1003). In the process of S1003, when it is determined that the value of the effective period measurement counter 203s is 0 (S1003: Yes), the period for determining that the ball has entered the second entrance B640b is normal. Therefore, the special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is set to OFF (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005.

  If it is determined in the process of S1001 that the value of the valid period measurement counter 203s is 0 (S1001: No), the process from S1002 to S1004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1005. If it is determined in the process of S1003 that the value of the valid period measurement counter 203s is greater than 0 (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1005.

  In the process of S1005, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S1005). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second entrance B640b is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1005: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S1005: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1006), and the second symbol display device 83 If the display mode is not changing (S1006: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S1007). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1008), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 0 (not 0). Is determined (S1008: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1009).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1011).

  When the processing of S1011 is completed, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired based on the second random number table 202d (S1012). More specifically, the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202d. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 199”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “200 to 398”, the normal symbol is off. It is determined that

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S1012 is a normal symbol win (S1013). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S1013: Yes), The display mode of the hour is set (S1014). In the process of S1014, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit on as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the time is short (whether or not the value of the time / counter counter 203h is greater than 0) (S1015), and when it is determined that the time is not short (the value of the time / counter counter 203h is 0). (S1015: No), since the gaming state is not short, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of opening times is set to 1 (S1016), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds In step S1017, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1015, when it is determined that the time is short (when the value of the short-time counter 203h is greater than 0) (S1015: Yes), the gaming state is short, so the opening time of the electric accessory 640a Is set to 0.5 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1018), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1 second (S1019), and this processing is terminated.

  In this way, when the normal symbol game state is the short-time game state (during short-time operation), the fluctuation display time is “180 seconds → 1 second "becomes very short, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance B640b becomes very long as" 0.2 seconds x 1 time-> 0.5 seconds x 2 times ". Thus, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance B640b.

  In the process of S1013, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S1013: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1020). In the process of S1020, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disengagement is completed, the normal symbol variation time is set to 180 seconds (S1017), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S1006, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1006: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S1021). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1017 or the processing of S1019 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S1021 (S1021: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S1021 (S1021: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1022). In the process of S1022, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1014, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S1020, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S1022, when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 50) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is stopped and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1014 or S1020.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S1023). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S1023: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance B640b is set (S1024). When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S1024, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 50) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S1016 or S1018 are completed.

  When the process of S1024 is completed, the special figure 2B effective period flag 203r is set to ON in order to measure the opening period of the electric accessory 640a set in the process of S1024 (S1025), and the effective period measurement counter 203s is set to 1000. (2 seconds) is set (S1026), and this process ends. By the processes of S1025 and S1026, it is possible to determine whether the timing at which the game ball enters the second entrance B640b is the release period of the electric accessory 640a. In other words, it is possible to detect that a game ball has entered the second entrance B640b due to fraudulent action or the like, even though it is not the opening period of the electric accessory 640a.

  In the present embodiment, since the opening operation is performed for 0.5 seconds × 2 times for the electric accessory 650a in the short-time gaming state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 650a is completed during the opening operation time. 2 seconds, including the allowable time until the ball passes through the second entrance B640a, is used as the effective period of FIG. 2B, and the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 executed at a cycle of 2 milliseconds is used. Although 1000 is set in the effective period measurement counter 203s to be subtracted in this way, for example, an effective period may be set for each opening operation of the electric accessory 650a.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1023, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S1023: No), there is no need to perform the opening control of the electric accessory 640a, so the process of S1024 to S1026 is skipped, The process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1102). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than an upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1103).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1104). Then, based on the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f added in the processing of S1104, a general-purpose reserved ball number command is set (S1105).

  The general-purpose reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) described later executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the general-purpose reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the general-purpose reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the general-purpose reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223d.

  When the processing of S1105 is completed, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is used as the free reserved area (holding first 1) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Stored in the first area (area-reserved fourth area) (S1106). In the process of S1106, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, a general-purpose advance determination result is acquired based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the processing of S1106 and the second per-random number table 202d (S1107), and the normal-prediction result is acquired based on the general-purpose prior determination result A winning information command is set (S1108), and this process ends.

  The general winning prize information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 50) described later executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the common winning prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the common figure preliminary determination result from the usual winning prize information command, and stores the extracted value in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the usual map prior determination result.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol, and the more the number of reserved balls, the more the game It is set to be advantageous to the person. Accordingly, a state in which a ball can enter the second entrance B640b provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state compared to the normal gaming state.

  By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the usual prior determination result, the player can play a game without missing a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using the result of prior determination of such a normal figure, not only the effect based on the determination result of the normal figure but also the electric accessory 640a when the normal figure is determined to be hit is opened. It is recommended to produce an effect that suggests the timing. In this way, in the normal gaming state, the game is aimed at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second pitching device 640 (the device accompanied by the electric accessory 640 a) is placed on the right side of the game board 13. Even if it is arranged, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 640a performs the opening operation. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility of a ball entering the second entrance B640b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the door passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this door passage processing (S109). This door passing time process (S109) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 34), and is a process for determining whether or not the ball winning to the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is normal.

  In the door passing process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 has detected a ball (S1201). In the processing of S1201, when it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 has not detected a sphere, that is, when it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 is not set to ON ( S1201: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 has detected a sphere, that is, when it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 is set to ON (S1201). : Yes), it is determined with reference to the executed small hit scenario whether the ball can pass through the second variable winning device 650 (within the passable period) (S1202).

  In addition, in each small win scenario, in addition to the motion control scenario executed during the small hit game, in order to determine an abnormality during the small hit game, the ball that won the second variable winning device 650 (door 650f) A period for valid (normal) handling and a period for valid (normal) handling of a ball that has passed through a specific area in the second variable prize-winning device 650 are set (see FIG. 15).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the current time is within the passable period (S1202: Yes), a door passing command is set (S1203), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that it is not within the passable period (S1202: No), an error command is set (S1204), and this processing ends.

  The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) described later executed by the MPU 201, the error command is sent. It is transmitted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the error content from the error command, and makes a notification based on the extracted content, the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. And run with

  In this way, by providing a period for making the winning valid (normal) and not making it valid (abnormal), even during a small hit game, for the winning to the second variable winning device 650, It is possible to prevent an act of illegally winning a ball to the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game.

  In addition, since the period for enabling the passage of the door 650f (passable period) is set in the small hit scenario, the opening pattern of the door 650f whose operation is controlled during the small hit game is changed according to the small hit type. In the case (when a different small hit scenario is selected), the opening pattern of the door 650f and the passable period can be set in association with each other, and the passable period suitable for the open pattern of the door 650f is easily set. There is an effect that can be.

  In this embodiment, when the passage of the sphere is outside the passable period (S1202: No), only the error command is set without setting the door pass command, but the door pass command is set. An error command may be set above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the V-passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this V-passing process (S110). This V-passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and it is determined whether or not the passing of the ball to the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) in the second variable winning device 650 is normal. This is a process for determining.

  In this V-passing process (S110), first, it is determined whether or not the passage detection switch 650e5 provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 has detected a ball (S1301). If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the passage detection switch 650e5 has not detected a sphere, that is, if it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 is not set to ON (S1301: No), this processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the passage detection switch 650e5 has detected a sphere (S1301: Yes), then whether or not the present time is within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario is determined. It is determined (S1302).

  In the process of S1302, when it is determined that it is not within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1303), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1302 that it is within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario (S1302: Yes), then the small hit type of the small hit game being executed is set. The jackpot type value is read (S1304). That is, when the small hit game being executed is a small hit C, the big hit C is read as the jackpot type value, and when the small hit game being executed is other than the small hit C, the big hit D is read as the big hit type value (FIG. 11 (a )reference).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type value read in S1304 is a jackpot C (S1305). If it is determined that the jackpot C is a jackpot C in the processing of S1305 (S1305: Yes), the jackpot C is indicated. The V flag 203m is turned on (for example, the V flag 203m is set to “1”) (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1305 that the jackpot is other than C (big hit D) (S1305: No), the V flag 203m indicating the big hit D is turned on (for example, the V flag 203m is set to “2”). (S1309), the process proceeds to S1307.

  Then, after the processing of S1306 or S1309 is executed, a V passing command is set (S1307), and thereafter the hour / midtime counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1308).

  In this way, even if a small hit game is being played with respect to a winning to the second variable winning device 650, by providing a period for validating the winning (normal) and a period not valid (abnormal), the small It is possible to prevent an act of illegally passing a ball to a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during a winning game.

  In the present embodiment, when the passage detection switch 650e5 detects a sphere outside the passable period, an error command is set and the process is terminated without setting the V flag 203m on. Even if the ball passes the specific area outside the passable period, the V flag 203m is not set to ON. Therefore, even if the ball is illegally passed to the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit after the small hit game ends. The game is never executed. Therefore, there is an effect that illegal games can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which it is determined whether the timing when the sphere passes through the specific region is normal, and whether there is an abnormality (error) is used. A configuration may be used.

  For example, the case where the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two or more balls in one small hit game may be determined as abnormal. This is a configuration in which the number of balls that can pass through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during one small hit game is made by the operation control of each configuration of the second variable winning device 650 in this embodiment. Adopted. Therefore, the case where the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two or more balls in one small hit game may be determined as abnormal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 has detected a sphere and the detection of the sphere (passing through a specific region) is within the passable period, the passable period The detection of the outer sphere (passing through the specific area) can be processed as an abnormality. For example, it is first determined whether the current time is within the passable period, and if it is within the passable period, the pass detection switch 650e5 It may be configured to determine whether or not a sphere has been detected.

  Furthermore, the passage detection switch 650a1 detects a ball during one small hit game based on the detection results of the passage detection switch 650a1 that detects a winning to the door 650f and the passage detection switch 650e5 that is a specific area. In spite of not doing, you may make it discriminate | determine that it is abnormal when the passage detection switch 650e5 detects a sphere.

  In this way, for example, it is possible to monitor an illegal game in which a sphere is retained in the V discharge flow path 650e3 and the sphere retained within the passable period is allowed to pass to a specific area.

  In addition, there is provided means for determining whether or not the current small hit game is a small hit that can pass V, and using the determination result, even if the small hit is impossible (difficult) for V passing, A case where the detection switch 650e5 detects a sphere may be determined as abnormal.

  In addition, the plurality of abnormality monitoring processes described above are configured so that the ball that first wins the second variable winning device 650 after the small hit game is executed can win the V discharge channel 650e3 as in this embodiment. By using it, it becomes possible to monitor illegal games more reliably.

  That is, when an attempt is made to pass a ball through the pass detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area, illegally, the pass detection switch 650e5 does not win the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. When the ball detects a ball, it is possible to determine that the ball is abnormal. Furthermore, if even one ball is won by the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two balls and this is abnormal. It becomes possible to discriminate.

  Further, if the current small hit game is a small hit game that cannot pass V, the ball won by the second variable winning device 650 does not pass through the pass detection switch 650e5, and thus passes through the pass detection switch 650e5. Since the passing detection switch 650e5 detects the ball during the small hit game in which the number of balls to be played is V but cannot pass V, it can be determined that the ball is abnormal.

  In addition, what is necessary is just to comprise so that an error command may be set and output to the exterior, when the determination result of each abnormality determination process mentioned above is determined to be abnormal. In this case, the error command may be configured to include identification information that can identify the cause of the abnormality and priority information that indicates the priority of the abnormality that has occurred.

  Here, the priority information is information for easily determining whether or not the abnormality that has occurred is an abnormality that has occurred due to an illegal game. For example, the number of balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 ( Priority information with a high priority is given to an abnormality determined that the number of balls that have passed through a specific area (pass detection switch 650e5) is greater than the number of balls detected by the passage detection switch 650a1). Is set and priority information with a low priority is set for an abnormality that has been determined that the ball has passed the specific area outside the passable period during the small hit game. .

  As described above, although any abnormality cannot occur in an appropriate game, if a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously in one pachinko machine 10 by providing a priority among them, a high priority abnormality Can be preferentially notified, and the processing after the occurrence of an abnormality can be smoothly performed.

  In addition, each abnormality discrimination | determination process with respect to passage of the sphere to a specific area may combine all, and may combine the one part suitably.

  Here, an error command that is set when an abnormality is determined as a result of each abnormality determination process described above is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and will be described later with a main process (see FIG. 50) in the external output process (S1701), it is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the audio lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal board (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the error content from the error command, and makes a notification based on the extracted content, the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. And run with

  Next, the V gate drive control process (S111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the V gate drive control process (S111). The V gate drive control process (S111) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34) and is a process for controlling the drive of the V gate 650d controlled by the main controller 110. Note that both the open counter 203n and the close counter 203o used in the V gate drive control process are incremented by 1 in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds. 2 milliseconds have passed.

  In the V gate drive control process (S111), first, it is determined whether the interrupt process is the first interrupt process after the power is turned on (S1401). In the process of S1401, if it is determined that the interrupt process is the first interrupt process after power-on (S1401: Yes), the V gate solenoid 650d2 is set to ON (S1402), and the V gate 650d is set to the inductive state (open).

  Then, a V gate state command indicating that the state of the V gate 650d is the guidance state (open) is set (S1403), the value of the open counter 203n is incremented by 1 (S1404), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the interrupt process is not the first interrupt process after power-on (S1401: No), it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203n is 0 (S1405). If it is determined in step S1405 that the value of the release counter 203n is not 0 (S1405: No), it is then determined whether the value of the release counter 203n is greater than 750 (1.5 seconds have passed). (S1406).

  In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the value of the open counter 203n is not greater than 750 (750 or less) (S1406: No), the open counter 203n is incremented by 1 in S1404, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1406 that the value of the open counter 203n is greater than 750 (S1406: Yes), the value of the open counter 203n is reset to 0 (S1407), and the V gate solenoid 650d2 is set to OFF. (S1408), V gate 650d is set to a restricted state (closed).

  Then, a V gate state command indicating that the state of the V gate 650d is in the restricted state (closed) is set (S1409), the value of the close counter 203o is incremented by 1 (S1410), and this process ends.

  In the processing of S1405, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203n is 0 (S1405: Yes), that is, the value of the release counter 203n is once larger than 750, and the value of the release counter 203n is the value in S1407. Is reset to 0, it is next determined whether or not the value of the closing counter 203o is greater than 1750 (3.5 seconds have passed) (S1411).

  In the process of S1411, when the value of the closing counter 203o is not larger than 1750 (1750 or less) (S1411: No), the value of the closing counter 203o is incremented by 1 (S1410), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1411 that the value of the closing counter 203o is greater than 1750 (S1411: Yes), the value of the closing counter 203o is reset to 0 (S1412), and the V gate solenoid 650d2 is set to ON. (S1413), a V gate state command indicating opening is set (S1414), the value of the opening counter 203n is incremented by 1 (S1415), and this process is terminated.

  The V gate state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 50) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V gate state command, it can extract the state of the V gate 650d from the V gate state command, and can grasp the operation state of the V gate 650d. In particular, the V gate state command set in S1403 is used when the audio lamp control device 113 sets the V gate scenario 222c (see FIG. 58).

  As described above, the V gate 650d in the present embodiment is controlled so as to always perform a constant operation (an operation of repeating 1.5 seconds of opening and 3.5 seconds of closing) after the power is turned on. ing.

  In this embodiment, as a control in which a constant operation is always performed, in this embodiment, the values counted by the counters (opening counter 203n and closing counter 203o) are set in advance as the guidance (opening) state and the regulation (closing) state, respectively. Control is performed to switch the operating state of the V gate 650d when the counter value reached is reached, but other configurations may be used.

  For example, an operation scenario that defines the operation content of the V-gate 650d (provider operation scenario) is provided, and is counted each time a timer interrupt that is executed periodically (cycle of 2 milliseconds) is executed in the main controller 110. The operation scenario that defines the operation content of the V gate 650d is updated using the value of the counter (the accessory operation counter), and the V gate 650d is operated based on the updated operation scenario content. Also good. In this case, since the V gate 650d only executes a certain operation repeatedly, it may be configured to loop one operation scenario.

  Further, as described above, when using a counter (an accessory action counter) for updating the action scenario (an accessory action scenario) of the V gate 650d, the value of the accessory action counter is set as the value of the variation type counter CS1. It may be used. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to select the variation type associated with the operation of the V gate 650d (the accessory). In addition, a plurality of control processes executed by main controller 110 can be executed based on a common counter value.

  For example, the variation type (variation time) of the selected special symbol is different between the value of the counter indicating that the V gate 650d is open and the value of the counter indicating that the V gate 650d is closed. In addition, a special symbol variation pattern selection table may be configured. Specifically, the counter referred to in each of the variation pattern selection tables 202e1 to 202e3 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) set in the variation pattern selection table 202 (see FIG. 11) is changed from the variation type counter CS1 to the accessory. Change to the value of the operation counter. Then, in the process (S401 in FIG. 37) of acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37), the value of the accessory action counter is acquired instead of the variation type counter CS1. The variation pattern is selected with reference to the value of the accessory action counter.

  Examples of the variation pattern selected with reference to the accessory action counter include, for example, small hits in the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (see FIG. 13) referred to when the special symbol lottery result is small hit. A variation pattern set in correspondence with A includes a value of the accessory action counter indicating that the V gate 650d is open, and a value of the accessory action counter indicating that the V gate 650d is closed. Are set so that the variation patterns selected in the above are different, and the variation pattern (variation time) set corresponding to the value of the accessory action counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open state is defined as the variation pattern. It is good to set so that the small hit at which V is executed becomes a small hit that can pass V.

  That is, the period until the special symbol lottery result is confirmed and displayed as the small hit A (variation time) and the period from the start of the small hit A game until the ball can pass through the specific area 650e5 (small hit After the lapse of the total of the period from the start of the game to the winning ball V gate arrival timing (see FIG. 27, 5 seconds in the first embodiment), the variation pattern (variation is performed so that the V gate 650d is opened. Time). Specifically, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set. Thereby, when the change of the special symbol elected to the small hit A is started at the timing when the V gate 650d is opened, it is possible to provide the small passable V hit.

  In this way, when the operating situation of the accessory (V gate 650d) and the winning game (small winning A game) based on the lottery result of the special symbol are executed at a specific timing (while the V gate 650d is opened, a prize is won) When a small hit A is executed so that the arrival timing of the ball V gate arrives, in a gaming machine to which a privilege (big hit game) advantageous to the player is given, it is used for operation control of an accessory (V gate 650d) Executed when the accessory is in a predetermined operation mode (V gate 650d is in the open state) by configuring the change pattern (variation time) of the special symbol using the value of the counter (the accessory operation counter). It is possible to make the special symbol variation to be a special symbol variation advantageous to the player.

  As a result, it is possible to execute a control that associates the operation control of the accessory with the special symbol lottery, which was conventionally independent, and the player can execute the action status of the accessory and the change of the special symbol. Playing games while being aware of this. Therefore, for example, even if the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the timing of the special symbol variation is influenced by the timing at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped. In other words, even if a special symbol variation that the player is not interested in (a special symbol variation that is out of place or a special symbol variation in which an effect that is unlikely to be a big hit is performed), Because we will pay attention to the timing when the special symbol fluctuation stops rather than the fluctuation lottery result, it becomes possible to make interest in the special symbol fluctuation and suppress the player from getting bored early in the game There is an effect that can be done.

  Further, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern for each gaming state (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and variation pattern selection corresponding to a gaming state (short-time gaming state) advantageous to the player is provided. In the table, it is preferable to select a variation pattern (variation time) with reference to the value of the counter for controlling the operation of the above-mentioned accessory (the accessory operation counter). With this configuration, for example, even if the value of the accessory action counter is a value indicating that the accessory (V gate 650d) is open, the accessory (V gate 650d) is closed. Even if the value is a value indicating that the player is in the game, by setting the variation pattern (variation time) so that the small hit A game started after the execution of the selected variation pattern becomes the small V hit possible small hit, In an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to ensure that the small hit A game is a small hit that can pass V. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player in a state that satisfies a predetermined condition (short-time gaming state) as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

  In the first embodiment, a counter (variation type counter CS1) that is referred to when a special symbol variation pattern is selected at the timing (special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37)) at which the special symbol variation starts. ) Is obtained, but other configurations may be used. For example, the timing at which the start winning process (see FIG. 39) is executed, that is, the start winning opening (the first winning slot 64a, the first winning slot) 2 entrance A64b, 2nd entrance B640b), the value of the counter (variation type counter CS1) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the processing executed when the ball enters You may comprise so that it may acquire.

  In addition, as a technique for using the value of the counter used for controlling the operation of the V gate 650d (the accessory action counter) in other controls, a counter that is referred to when a special symbol variation pattern is selected (this embodiment) Shows an example of using instead of the variation type counter CS1), but it may be used instead of the first random number counter C1. In this case, the value of the counter (the accessory action counter) for updating the operation scenario of the accessory (V gate 650d) may be used as it is, or a random number using the hit of the accessory action counter is generated, The random number may be used in place of the first random number counter C1.

  Specifically, the value of the accessory action counter (for example, 0 to 2500) added in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 executed every 2 milliseconds, and the main process of the main controller 110 Alternatively, a value obtained by combining a value (for example, 0 to 2500) of an initial value random number counter that is updated using the remaining time may be used instead of the first random number counter C1. Thereby, since the value of the counter used for the special symbol hit determination can be set in a complicated manner, it is possible to prevent fraud. In addition, by using the value of one counter (object action counter) for a plurality of controls, the number of counters mounted on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the processing burden can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the V gate 650d always uses a constant control. For example, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 hours) elapses, the period of the induction (open) state is extended, An operation control that is always executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as extending a period of a guidance (open) state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the end of the big hit game, may be added. .

  In this way, it is possible to substantially change the probability that a big hit game via a small hit game will be executed based on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a game that is surprising to the player There is an effect that it becomes possible to provide.

  Further, for example, on the condition that the occurrence of the big hit game via the small hit game has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the timing at which the V gate 650d enters the induction (open) state, or the induction (open) You may shorten the period which becomes a state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further complicate the timing at which a specific area in a small hit game can be passed, and there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1612 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1612. As will be described later in the processing of S1715 in FIG. 50, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S1610, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each process of S1701 to S1708 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1711 and S1712 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 34) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) or the start winning process (see FIG. 39) or the winning information command set in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 42). Send to. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the jackpot opening command set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) and the like set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 51) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the error command set in the door passage process (see FIG. 45) and the V passage process (see FIG. 46), the V gate state command set in the V gate drive control process (see FIG. 47), etc. It transmits to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Note that the external output processing in the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that various commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by an external terminal plate (not shown). For example, various error commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Yes.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and reset to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703). Then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning port 65a of the one variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). Details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  When the process of S1704 is completed, a small hit control process is executed (S1705). Details of the small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance B640b of the second entrance device 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S1024 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 43), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S1016 or the processing of S1018 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1707). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 37), variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) is ended, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Is stopped, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (lighted display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of a second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S1017 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 43) or the processing of S1019, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1022 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 43), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (indicating display) in the display mode set by the processing of S1014 or the processing of S1020 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 43). To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1710). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1710: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1710: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1711, S1712).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1711). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 398 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1712).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1709, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 48 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1713 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1713), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1714). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1715), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1716), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  It should be noted that the processing of S1709 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1708 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1711 and S1712 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 50). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the first specific winning prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1801). Specifically, the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) or the process of S2107 of the small hitting ending control process (see FIG. 54) described later is executed to determine whether the big hit scenario is set. To do. That is, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a big hit, and the big hit scenario is set based on whether the big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result or the specific area (pass detection switch 650e5) is passed during the small hit game. Determine if it is set. If it is determined in the processing of S1801 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1801: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that a jackpot scenario has been set (S1801: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p (S1802), and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is It is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S1803). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (see FIG. 14), since the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponding to the start of opening (opening start) is 1, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is 1. Is determined.

  In the processing of S1803, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the opening start (the counter value is 1 if the jackpot scenario a) (S1803: Yes), the jackpot opening command Is set (S1804), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the opening start (S1803: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the round start (in the jackpot scenario a) If there is, it is determined whether the counter value is 1251) (S1805).

  In the process of S1805, when it is determined that the count value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1805: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened in the process of S1806. (The specific door solenoid 65f2 is set to ON so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning opening 65a is opened), and then a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set ( S1807), the process is terminated.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1805 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1805: No), then the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed. It is determined whether the condition is satisfied (S1808). Here, as a condition for closing the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a in the present embodiment, when 30 seconds have passed since the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened, or specific It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls is won after the winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened.

  In the processing of S1808, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is satisfied (S1808: Yes), the count value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is set to the currently executed round. Is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round (S1809), and this process ends. If it is determined in S1808 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next jackpot control process. .

  Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, if the closing condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls has won the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, that is, a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (counter value update). In the case of closing the specific winning port (first specific winning port) 65a, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is updated to the value immediately before the counter value for which the corresponding operation control is executed. (Operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process).

  By doing in this way, the operation control (for example, the operation control that closes the specific winning opening when the ball has won a predetermined number of times) that is executed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (counter value update) becomes a jackpot scenario. It is possible to execute based on this. Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the operation control is performed based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has elapsed, and without being based on the jackpot scenario when there is a predetermined number of winnings. There is no need to perform complicated control such as execution of operation control, and it is possible to simplify the design and to prevent a situation in which both operation controls are mixed.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1808, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65 is not satisfied (S1808: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the end of the round. It is determined whether or not the value to be obtained (the counter value is 8750 if the jackpot scenario is a) (S1810).

  In the process of S1810, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1810: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed in the process of S1811. (The specific door solenoid 65f2 is set to OFF so that the specific door 65f of the first specific prize winning opening 65a is closed), and the process is terminated. Note that the above-described determination processing from S1805 to S1810 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1810, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is not a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1810: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to ( If it is a value big hit scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1812). In the process of S1812, when it is determined that the count value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1812: Yes), an interval command is set (S1813), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1812 that the count value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is not a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1812: No), then a jackpot ending control process (S1814) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the jackpot game, that is, the end of the last round of the jackpot game until the start of the special symbol change. .

  Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1814) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending control process (S1814). This jackpot ending control process (S1814) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 51).

  In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of ending (the counter value is 40751 for the jackpot scenario a) (S1901). In the process of S1901, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of ending (S1901: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1902), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is not a value corresponding to the ending start (S1901: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (a jackpot scenario a) If there is, it is determined whether the counter value is 42000) (S1903). In the process of S1903, when it is determined that the count value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is not a value corresponding to the end of ending (S1903: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1903 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the end of ending (S1903: Yes), then the jackpot scenario setting is cleared (S1904), The scenario counter 203p is reset to 0 (S1905). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot jackpot type executed this time is jackpot C (S1906). In the processing of S1906, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot C (the jackpot A, B, D) (S1906: No), the counter value of the hour / minute counter 203h is set to 8 (S1907), This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot C (S1906: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In other words, when the jackpot type is other than jackpot C (jackpot A, B, D), by setting the counter value of the hour and middle counter 203h to 8, until the special symbol is changed eight times from the end of the jackpot game ( The special game lottery is executed 8 times, and the game state is set to the short-time game state (short-time state) until the eighth lottery result is stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53, the small hit control process (S1705) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this small hitting control process (S1705). This small hitting control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 50), and setting of commands for causing the sound lamp control device 113 to execute various effects corresponding to the small hitting or the second specification. This is a process for controlling the operation of the door solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the winning opening 650a and the operation of the stopper solenoid 650c2 for changing the position of the stopper (ball stop member) 650c.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit scenario is set (S2001). Specifically, the processing of S502 and S503 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed to determine whether the small hit scenario is set. In the process of S2001, if the small hit scenario is not set (S2001: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the process of S2001 (S2001: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q (S2002), and the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is small hit. It is determined whether it is the start timing of the scenario (S2003). For example, when the small hit scenario a is set (see FIG. 15B), since the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q corresponding to the start of opening (opening start) is 1, the small hit scenario counter 203q Whether the value is 1 is determined.

  In the process of S2003, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of opening (if the small hit scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S2003: Yes), the process of S2004 performs the stopper. (Ball stop member) 650c is set to the ball stop position (the stopper solenoid 650c2 is set to ON so that the stopper 650c can be changed to the ball stop position). Then, a small hitting opening command is set (S2005), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value that does not correspond to the start of opening (S2003: No), then the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q corresponds to the value of the round start (in the small hit scenario a) If there is, it is determined whether the counter value is 626) (S2006).

  In the process of S2006, when the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S2006: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed based on the small hit scenario in the process of S2007. (Turn on or off the door solenoid 650f2 so that the door 650f of the second specific prize winning opening 650a is opened or closed), and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, as the operation control executed based on the small hit scenario, the operation control may be performed so that the second specific prize opening 650a is opened and closed a plurality of times during one round of the small hit game. For example, when the small hit scenario is the small hit scenario b, the opening / closing operation in which the opening period of the second specific winning opening 650a is 0.1 second and the closing period is 0.9 second is repeated during one round. Is set to Such operation control is executed in the processing of S2007.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2006, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S2006: No), it is next determined whether or not the round end condition is satisfied (S2008). Here, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are won in total while the second specific winning opening 650a is opened.

  In the process of S2008, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific prize winning opening 650a is satisfied (S2008: Yes), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is set to 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round. The value is updated to the subtracted value (S2009), and this process ends. If it is determined in step S2008 that the round end condition is satisfied, the round end condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the round end condition is satisfied again in the subsequent control. Yes.

  Here, the small hit scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the small hit counter 203q and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value in the same manner as the big hit scenario described above. Yes. Therefore, when the round end condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the second specific winning opening 650a, that is, the round ends due to a factor that does not accompany the lapse of time (counter value update). In the case of performing (closing the second specific winning opening 650a), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is updated to the value immediately before the counter value for which the corresponding operation control is executed ( The operation control is executed in the next small hitting control process).

  In this way, operation control (for example, operation control for ending a round when a predetermined number of balls have won a prize) executed based on a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (counter value update) is based on the small hit scenario. Can be executed. Therefore, as a condition for ending the round of the second specific winning opening 650a, the operation control is performed based on the small hit scenario when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the operation control is performed based on the small hit scenario when there is a predetermined number of winnings. There is no need to perform complicated control such as executing the control, and it is possible to simplify the design and to prevent a situation in which both operation controls are mixed.

  Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S2008, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S2008: Yes), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the end of round (small) If the winning scenario is a, it is determined whether the counter value is 1000) (S2010).

  In the process of S2010, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S2010: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is set to be closed in the process of S2011. (The door solenoid 650f2 is set to OFF so that the door 650f of the second specific prize winning opening 650a is closed), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2010 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the end of the round (S2010: No), then the small hitting ending control process (S2013) is executed. . This small hitting ending control process is a process executed during a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the small hit game, that is, the end of the small hit game round until the start of the special symbol change. It is.

  Next, the small hitting ending control process (S2012) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the small hitting ending control process (S2012). This small hitting ending control process (S2012) is a process executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 53).

  In the small hitting ending control process, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the small hitting scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of ending (the counter value is 1001 for the small hitting scenario a) (S2101). In the process of S2101, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of ending (S2101: Yes), a small hit ending command is set (S2102), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the start of ending (S2101: No), then the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q indicates the stopper (ball stop member) 650c. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the ball stop release to be changed to the release position (the counter value is 1125 for the small hit scenario a) (S2103). In the process of S2103, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the ball stop release (S2103: Yes), the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is set to the release position (the stopper 650c is The stopper solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF so as to change from the ball stop position to the release position) (S2104), and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, there is an interval of 0.5 seconds after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed until the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position. This is the time provided for discharging balls other than the ball retained by the stopper (ball stopper) 650c out of the second variable winning device 650 out of the balls won in the second specific prize opening 650a. . Therefore, at the timing when the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position, only one ball (the ball retained by the ball stop member 650c) exists in the second variable winning device 650, and the ball It is possible to prevent the other balls from obstructing the flow of the game and to provide an appropriate game.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. In the process of S2103, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the ball stop release (S2103: No), then the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is determined to pass V. It is determined whether the value corresponds to (the counter value is 1500 for the small hit scenario a) (S2105).

  Here, the V passage determination indicates the timing for determining the result of the V passage processing (see FIG. 46) executed in the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110. In this V-passing process, the ball is discharged within a specific area (V discharge of the second variable winning device 650) within the V passing effective period set in the small hit scenario (the counter value 1250 to 1500 in the small hit scenario a). The V flag 203m is set to ON when the passage detection switch 650e5) provided in the flow path 650e3 is passed. That is, it is provided to determine whether or not the V flag 203m is set to ON by the processing at the time of passing V at the timing when the V passing effective period has elapsed.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform processing reliably based on the fact that the sphere has passed the specific area within the V passing effective period. For example, when the V flag 203m is set to ON, the next processing may be immediately performed.

  In the process of S2105, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the V passage determination (S2105: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2105 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the V passage determination (S2105: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V flag 203m is set to ON next. (S2106).

  In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the V flag 203m is not set to ON (S2106: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203m is set to ON (S2106: Yes), then the big hit type assigned to the small hit being executed (if the small hit A, the big hit type D (See FIG. 11A)) is set (S2107). Then, the V flag 203m is set off (S2108), the V passing jackpot type value is cleared (S2109), and this process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, since all the small hit games are set as one round game, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, a process for setting a command related to the number of rounds and an interval period (round) In the case where a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the big hit game described above may be set.

  In this embodiment, the small hit scenario is set for the period in which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game ends, a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. A small hit scenario may be set for the interval. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passing effective period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of the control processing can be reduced.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 55, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of the main process (FIG. 56) is performed according to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). (S2318) is determined during the execution (S2202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 56, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2315 in FIG. 56), it executes a power-off process in S2318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2318 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S2202: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S2318 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2203: Yes), the process proceeds to S2204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2203: No), the process proceeds to S2208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2204. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S2318, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2203: No), and the process proceeds to S2208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S2202: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S2204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S2318 is executed (see S2317 in FIG. 56). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2318 is executed, the startup process this time is the moment when the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2318 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S2208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S2211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S2208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S2208 is performed via the process of S2204 to S2206. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S2208: No), S2209, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2210), and interrupt permission is set. (S2211). Then, the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S2209 is that when the process from S2204 to S2208 is reached via the process in S2206, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S2301 was executed (S2301). If the time has not elapsed (S2301: No), the processing proceeds to S2312 without performing the processing of S2302 to S2311. Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S2301 is mainly processing related to display (production) in S2302 to S2311, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2313 and the variable display setting process of S2314 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2313 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2314 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2301 (S2301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2303 to S2314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S2302). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2308 described later (S2303), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S2304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2305 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (S2306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed. The setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (Ds1) according to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 (the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b) operated by the player to enhance the production effect is pressed is monitored. This is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to the case where 22 inputs are confirmed. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. The frame button input monitoring / effect process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Further, for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during a high-speed change period, a process of changing the stage is performed and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set May be. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S2307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S2308), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2310), and the process proceeds to S2311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S2309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S2310 is finished, a V counter update process for updating the value of the V counter 223t is executed (S2311). Details of the V counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2311 is completed, the effect counter 223g is updated (S2312), and the process proceeds to S2313.

  In the process of S2313, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S2313). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S2314). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S2314 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2315). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2315 (S2315: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S2317), and the power interruption processing is executed (S2318). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2319), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the processing of S2315 (S2315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2316: No), the process returns to S2301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2316: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S2313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2313). This command determination processing (S2313) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S2313), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main controller 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether a command has been received (S2401). When the variation pattern command is received (S2401: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S2402), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2403), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 65) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  If a variation pattern command has not been received (S2401: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2404). When the stop type command is received (S2404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2406). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 65) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if a stop type command has not been received (S2404: No), it is then determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2407). If a stop command is received (S2407: Yes), a display stop command is set based on the received stop command (S2408). On the other hand, if a stop command has not been received (S2408: No), it is next determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2409).

  In the processing of S2409, when the reserved ball number command is received (S2409: Yes), the reserved ball number counter of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) corresponding to the received reserved ball number command is displayed. A value included in the received number-of-holding-balls command is stored (S2410). Specifically, when the currently received reserved ball number command is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the special symbol 1 of the main controller 110 is received from the received reserved ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Thereafter, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set (S2411).

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is determined when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, the second entrance A64b or the second entrance B640b (start winning prize), or a special symbol is drawn. Is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the start winning prize is detected or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 number of held balls of the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S2410. The value of the counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be set to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, for example, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of detection or at the time of drawing a special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. For example, when the processing of S2411 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the display control device 114, based on the order of receiving the received reserved ball number command for display, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the reserved ball number symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol. For example, information stored in the fluctuation order storage area 203k of the main control device 110 is set as a fluctuation order command, and the voice lamp control device 113 is set to display the symbols and symbols in the small area Ds1. Display of the hold number symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the hold ball number command and the change order command received from the main control device 110 by the voice lamp control device 113. Information corresponding to the order may be included in the display reserved ball number command and transmitted to the display control device 114. By doing so, the display control device 114 only has to display the number of reserved balls based on the display-holding ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113, thereby reducing the processing burden on the display control device 114. It becomes possible to make it. In addition, even when the variation order of the special symbol is not the order in which the start winning prize is given, the reserved ball number symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved ball number symbol of the second special symbol can be displayed side by side.

  Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. In the process of S2409, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S2409: No), it is then determined whether or not a V gate state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2412). When a V gate state command is received (S2412: Yes), a V gate command reception process is executed (2413), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 58, the V gate command reception process (S2413) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the V gate command reception process (S2413). This V gate command reception process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d, This process is executed based on the V gate state command received from the control device 110. By executing the V gate command reception process, it is possible to grasp the operation of the V gate 650d on the sound lamp control device 113 side. It is also possible to determine whether the V gate 650d is operating normally.

  In the V gate command reception process, first, V gate state information based on the V gate state command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the V gate state storage area 223j (S2501). Here, the V gate state command received from the main controller 110 is set when the state of the V gate 650d is changed by the V gate drive control process (see FIG. 47) executed by the main controller 110. The V gate 650d is in an open state (inductive state in which the sphere can flow down the V discharge flow path 650e3) or closed (a restriction state in which the sphere cannot flow down the V discharge flow path 650e3 (difficult)) A command indicating which state is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2502). The V gate initial flag 223i is a flag that is set to ON in the above-described startup process (see FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113. If it is determined in step S2502 that the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2502: Yes), the V gate state information stored this time indicates that the V gate 650d is in the open (guidance) state. It is determined whether the information is indicated (S2503).

  In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that the information (V gate state information) stored this time is information indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open (guidance) state (S2503: Yes), the V gate scenario 222c. Is set (S2506), and the V gate initial flag 223i is set to OFF (S2507). Next, the V gate release timing is stored in the release timing storage area 223k based on the set V gate scenario 222c (S2508).

  That is, a series of processing from S2502 to S2508 is processing executed only when the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON, that is, when the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on. When the power of the control device 113 is turned on, the voice lamp control is performed based on the V gate state command received from the main control device 110 (V gate state command (see FIG. 47) set in S1403 of the V gate drive control process). A V-gate scenario 222c provided in the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the device 113 is set. In the V gate scenario 222c, an operation scenario corresponding to the V gate drive control process of the main controller 110 is defined. When the V gate scenario 222c is set, a V counter update process described later (see FIG. 72). As a result, the V counter 223t is updated.

  Of the operation scenarios defined in the V gate scenario 222c, the content corresponding to the value of the V counter 223t is the current operation state of the V gate 650d. As described above, by providing the V gate scenario 222c in the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the V gate 650d. Further, by referring to the V-gate scenario 222c, it is possible to assume the future operation state of the V-gate 650d (for example, assume that the V-gate 650d is in the inductive state between 3 seconds and 4.5 seconds later). It is possible to perform an effect based on the assumed information. Therefore, assuming a future operation state of the movable object (V gate 650d) that affects the game result, a game state using the assumption information (a game state advantageous to the player in the future is executed). It is possible to execute an effect (game situation assumption effect) for notifying whether or not), and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 58, the description will be continued. In the process of S2502, when the V gate initial flag 223i is not set to ON (S2502: No), or in the process of S2503, the currently stored information (V gate state information) indicates that the V gate 650d is in an open state. If it is determined that the information is information (S2503: No), it is determined whether the information stored this time matches the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c (S2504).

  In the processing of S2504, when it is determined that the information stored this time matches the contents of the V gate scenario 222c (S2504: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information stored this time does not match the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c (S2504: No), an error command is set (S2505), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2504, the update contents of the V gate scenario 222c set in S2506 are compared with the operation status of the V gate 650d indicated by the V gate state command received from the main control device 110, so that the V gate can be normally processed. It is configured to be able to determine whether the operation of 650d is controlled. In this way, it is possible to properly determine that the V gate 650d is not normally controlled in operation.

  In the process of S2504, it is determined whether the updated content of the V gate scenario 222c set in S2506 matches the operation status of the V gate 650d indicated by the V gate state command received from the main controller 110. However, for example, it may be configured to allow a predetermined range of error.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the operation control content of the main control device 110 and the V scenario update status of the sound lamp display device 113 are compared to grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. A sensor that detects the operation of the gate 650d may be provided, and the operation information of the V gate 650d detected by the sensor may be added to grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether normal operation control is being performed, and further to determine whether the operation is actually performed with respect to the operation control content. There is an effect that it is possible to more appropriately determine that 650d is not operating normally.

  In the present embodiment, the V gate 650d is always controlled with a constant operation. However, the operation content of the V gate 650d can be changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When configured to change, for example, when the number of jackpots per day exceeds 10 times, or when 10 hours have passed since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, one operation cycle of the V gate 650d When the control contents can be switched so that the proportion of the guidance state (the state in which the V gate 650d is opened) in the switch is low (for example, the guidance state is 1 second and the regulation state is 4 seconds), The V gate scenario 222c corresponding to the V gate scenario 222c is stored, and the V gate scenario 222c and the V counter 223t are reset at the timing when the control contents are switched. It is sufficient. With this configuration, even if the operation control content of the V gate 650d is switched during the game, it is possible to immediately grasp the operation state of the V gate.

  Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. If the V gate command has not been received in the process of S2412 (S2412: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2414). If a winning information command is received (S2414: Yes), a winning command receiving process is executed (S2415), and then this process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59, the winning command receiving process (S2415) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S2415). This winning command receiving process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a winning command is received from the main control device 110. Process.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning information based on the winning command received from the main control device 110 is winning information that continuously indicates the small hit A, the sign effect, the continuous effect, and the continuous jackpot effect can be executed. ing. In the winning command reception process, various flags and various counters that are referred to in order to execute the various effects described above are set.

  In the winning command reception process, first, winning information based on the winning command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2601). Here, the winning information includes information based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5.

  Next, it is determined whether the continuous production flag 223u is currently set on (S2602). If it is determined that the continuous production flag 223u is set on (S2602: Yes), an additional prize is awarded. The flag 223x is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2604. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223u is not set to ON (S2602: No), the process of S2603 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2604.

  When the process proceeds to S2604, it is determined whether or not the winning information stored this time is winning information indicating a small hit A (S2604). Here, as shown in FIG. 11 (a) or FIG. 15 (a), the small hit A is a small hit scenario in which a small hit scenario a that makes it easy for the second variable winning device 650 to win a ball during the small hit game is set. It is a hit type and is a small hit type for which the above-described continuous performance is performed.

  In the processing of S2604, when it is determined that the stored winning information includes information indicating the small hit A (S2604: Yes), next, whether or not a value has already been stored in the small hit consecutive number of times storage area 223o. A determination is made (S2608). When it is determined that a value is stored in the small hits continuous number storage area 223o (S2608: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that no value is stored in the small hit consecutive number storage area 223o (S2608: No), it is then determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is 3 (S2609). In the process of S2609, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuation counter 223n is 3 (S2609: Yes), this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, when winning information including information indicating the small hit A is continuously received (when winning is continuously won for the small hit A), the number of consecutive times is 2, and The contents of the continuous performance differ depending on the times. The specific small hit continuous counter 223n is a counter that counts the number of consecutive times.

  In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the continuous effect is set to 3 times, a winning command including information indicating the small hit A is newly received in the state where the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 3. However, the process of adding the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not performed (S2609). However, for example, when the upper limit of the continuous effect is set more than three times, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is set. May be added, and a continuous effect corresponding to the counter value may be executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2609 that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not 3, that is, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 0 to 2 (S2609: No), 1 is added to the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n (S2610), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 (S2611).

  In the process of S2611, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit consecutive counter 223n is 2 (S2611: Yes), the current number of reserved balls is set in the precursor effect counter 223p (S2612), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2611, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not 2, that is, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 1 or 3 (S2611: No), This process is finished as it is.

  The process of S2611 is a process for determining that the winning information including the information indicating the small hit A is continuously received (the winning is consecutive for the small hit A). When the counter value of 223n is 2, it is determined that the winning unit is continuously won. In addition, the sign effect counter 223p set in S2612 is a winning command determined to have been won consecutively for the small hit A (the winning including the information indicating the second small hit A among the consecutive small hits A) Command) is a counter that counts the order in which the holding ball corresponding to the command changes. The warning effect is executed until the counter value of the warning effect counter 223p reaches a predetermined value (2 in the present embodiment).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2604, the winning information stored this time is not winning information including information indicating the small hit A (includes information indicating the small hit corresponding to a small hit type other than the big hit, miss, or small hit A) (S2604: No), it is then determined whether or not the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 or more (S2605).

  In the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hitting continuous counter 223n is 2 or more (S2605: Yes), the counter value of the specific small hitting continuous counter 223n is then stored in the small hitting continuous count storage area. It is stored in 223o (S2606), the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is reset to 0 (S2607), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2605, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not 2 or more (S2605: No), the process of S2607 is executed by skipping the process of S2606. .

  In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of stored balls to be stored is set to eight, there may be a plurality of independently held balls that are successively won in the small hit A in the hold. Therefore, by executing the processing of S2608, the fluctuation based on the winning command that is won in succession for the first small hit A is executed, and until the value of the consecutive small hit number storage area 223o is reset to 0, Even if winning information including information indicating subsequent small hits A is received, the winning information is not reflected in the production. In this way, for example, when a prelude effect is executed based on a winning command that is continuously won for the small hit A first, a winning command that is subsequently won for the small hit A is generated. Even if it does, there is an effect that it is possible to eliminate the confusion of the player without switching the contents of the production.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, until the variation based on the winning command that has been successively won for the small hit A first is executed, the value for the next winning for the small hit A is produced. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, after a variation based on a winning command that is continuously won in the small hit A is executed first, A plurality of counter values of the specific small hitting continuous counter 223n may be stored so that an effect based on a winning command won in succession to A is executed. By doing in this way, the opportunity to perform continuous production increases, it is possible to provide a lot of suitable production corresponding to the game result to the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game There is.

  Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. If the winning command has not been received in the processing of S2414 (S2414: No), it is then determined whether or not a hit related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2416). When a hit related command is received (S2416: Yes), a hit related process is executed (S2417), and then this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 60, the hit-related process (S2417) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S2417). This hit-related process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed when a hit-related command is received from the main controller 110. Process.

  When the hit-related process is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot opening command is received (S2701). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2701: Yes), then the jackpot start effect process is executed (S2702), and this process ends. The jackpot start effect process is a process for setting a display jackpot opening command and extracting information to be referred to when setting various display ending commands used as a final round effect display according to the gaming state. The

  Here, with reference to FIG. 61, the jackpot start effect process (S2702) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the jackpot start effect process (S2702). This jackpot start effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp controller 113, and is executed when a jackpot opening command is received from the main controller 110. Process.

  When the jackpot start effect process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S2801). This continuation flag 223q is set to ON when the special symbol lottery result of the first variation after the end of the jackpot is a small hit A, and based on the continuation flag 223q being set to ON. The jackpot continuous effect described above is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S2801 that the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S2801: Yes), the V gate release timing stored in the V gate state storage area 223j is acquired (S2807), and Then, the door opening timing in the small hit game of the first rotation (first change) after the big hit ends is acquired from the game specification storage area 222b (S2808). Then, the final round of the jackpot ends as a timing for setting the fluctuation of the first rotation (first fluctuation) after the jackpot to the V passable fluctuation (variation of a special symbol in which the V hit small hit game is executed) The timing is stored in the end information storage area 223r (S2809).

  Thereafter, the continuous big hit effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2810), the continuation flag 223q is set to OFF (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2802. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the continuation flag 223q is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2801: No), the process of S2807 to S2811 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2802. Transition.

  In S2802, the display jackpot opening command is set based on the jackpot opening command received from the main controller 110 (S2802), and then the continuous production flag 223u is set to OFF (S2803), and the additional prize flag 223x is turned off. (S2804), the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is reset, and then the information stored in the V-passable fluctuation storage area 223m is cleared (S2806). Then, this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined in S2701 that the jackpot opening command has not been received (S2701: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S2703). If it is determined in the process of S2703 that a round number command has not been received (S2703: No), it is then determined whether a jackpot ending command has been received (S2709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2703 that a round number command has been received (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2704), and the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is counted. Is a value corresponding to the final round (10 if jackpot C) (S2705).

  In the processing of S2705, when it is determined that the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is a value corresponding to the final round (S2705: Yes), next, whether or not the continuous big hit effect flag 223s is set to ON. It is determined (S2706). When it is determined that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON, a display final round effect command is set based on the game timing information. By transmitting the final round effect command for display to the display control device 114, the fortune effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 33 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2705, when the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is not a value corresponding to the final round, or in the process of S2706, it is determined that the continuous big hit effect flag 223s is not set to ON. (S2706: No), a display round number command is set based on the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2708), and this process is terminated. Although omitted in FIG. 60, the continuous jackpot flag effect flag 223s is also displayed even when it is determined that the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is one before the last round (9 if the jackpot C). If it is determined whether or not the consecutive jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON, the effect (see FIG. 32A) indicating that the fortune effect is executed in the final round is the third effect. A dedicated display round number command is set to be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the various display round number commands set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are commands of the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221. In the output process (S2302), the data is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving various display round number commands, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the current round number is discriminated based on the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol device 81 is changed depending on whether or not the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set. However, it is possible to eliminate the processing of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command. .

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the process of S2709, if it is determined that the jackpot ending command has been received (S2709: Yes), then the jackpot end effect process is executed (S2710). The jackpot end effect process is a process for setting display contents to be displayed during the jackpot ending period. For example, when the fortune effect (the jackpot continuous effect) is executed in the final round, the result of the fortune effect The process which sets the production | presentation display which shows is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 62, the jackpot end effect process (S2710) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (S2710). This jackpot end effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp controller 113, and is executed when a jackpot ending command is received from the main controller 110. Process.

  When the jackpot end effect process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the consecutive jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2901). When it is determined that the consecutive jackpot effect flag 223s is not set to ON (S2901: No), a display jackpot normal ending command is set (S2902), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the timing of the end timing of the last round stored in the end information storage area 223r (jacket) It is determined whether or not the first rotation after the end (the first variation) is a timing at which the V passage variation is possible (S2903). The end timing of the final round is the timing at which the jackpot ending command is received. That is, it is determined whether the timing at which the process of S2903 is executed matches the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r.

  In the process of S2903, if it is determined that the timing does not coincide with the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r (S2903: No), a display jackpot failure ending command is set, and the process proceeds to S2905, while the end information is stored. If it is determined that the timing matches the timing stored in the area 223r (S2903: Yes), a display jackpot success ending command is set, and the process proceeds to S2905.

  When the display jackpot failure ending command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 displays Kokichi or Nakakichi as a result of the fortune effect. On the other hand, when the display jackpot success ending command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 displays Super-yoshi or Daikichi as a result of the fortune effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the end timing of the last round in the jackpot that can be changed arbitrarily by the player's game operation (easy) is stored in a predetermined condition (end information storage area 223r). The result of the jackpot continuous performance can be determined depending on whether or not it is satisfied. Therefore, the player can participate in the game eagerly, such as performing a game operation such as intentionally shifting the end timing of the final round, and can improve the interest of the game.

  Although omitted in FIG. 62, the display contents displayed during the jackpot ending period as a result of the jackpot continuous effect are the lottery results of the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball in addition to the determination result of the end timing of the final round described above. Also determined based on. For example, if the timing at which the processing of S2903 is executed matches the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r and the reserved ball includes a special symbol jackpot, Chokichi is selected. It is configured.

  By configuring in this way, the result can be arbitrarily changed by the player's gaming operation (easy) the final round end timing (first condition) in the jackpot, and arbitrarily changed by the player's gaming operation It becomes possible to determine the result of the big hit continuous effect depending on whether or not the lottery result (second condition) of the special symbol in the holding ball that is impossible (difficult) is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make the player participate in the game eagerly, and it is possible to display a wide variety of results as the result of the jackpot continuous production, thereby suppressing the player from getting bored with the game. There is an effect that can be done.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the process of S2709, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2709: No), the jackpot related process is executed (S2711). This small hit related process is executed when a special winning lottery is won and the small hit game is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 63, the small hit related process (S2711) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this small hit related process (S2711). This small hit related process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and a command (small hit) related to the small hit from the main controller 110. (Opening command, small hitting ending command, door passage command, V passage command).

  When the small hit related process is executed, it is first determined whether or not a small hit opening command has been received (S3001). Here, when it is determined that the small hit opening command has been received (S3001: Yes), the small hit start effect process is executed (S3002), and then this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the small hitting start effect process (S3002) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start effect process (S3002). This small hitting start effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small hitting. A small hitting opening command for display corresponding to the effect display is set, and various flags or various counters referred to when executing the continuous effect are set and updated.

  When the small hitting start effect process is executed, first, based on the received small hitting opening command, a small hitting effect pattern is selected from the small hitting effect pattern selection table (S3101). Specifically, based on the received small hitting opening command, the type of small hitting executed this time is determined, and a small hitting effect pattern is selected from the small hitting effect pattern selection table 222h. In the small hit effect pattern selection table 222h, as shown in FIG. 19A, in addition to the small hit type, the additional winning flag 223x, the continuous effect flag 223u, and the current small hit are small hits that can pass V. The small hit effect pattern is selected based on the determination result.

  Next, a display small hit opening command corresponding to the selected effect pattern is set (S3102), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous effect is 1 or more (S3103). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is smaller than 1 (S3103: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is 1 or more (S3103: Yes), the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is subtracted by 1 (S3104), and then the counter 223v during continuous performance is displayed. It is determined whether the counter value is 0 (S3105). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is not 0 (S3105: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3105, if it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is 0 (S3105: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the continuous performance ends with the current small hit, The flag 223u is set to OFF (S3106), the additional prize flag 223x is set to OFF (S3107), the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is reset to 0 (S3108), and is stored in the V passage variable storage area 223m. Is cleared (S3109), and this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3001 that a small hitting opening command has not been received (S3001: No), it is then determined whether a small hitting ending command has been received (S3003). If it is determined that a small hitting ending command has been received (S3003: Yes), a display small hitting ending command is set based on the received small hitting ending command (S3004), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3003 that a small hitting ending command has not been received (S3003: No), it is then determined whether a door passage command has been received (S3005). If it is determined that a door passage command has been received (S3005: Yes), a display door passage command is set based on the received door passage command (S3006), and the process ends.

  Here, when the display door passing command is set and transmitted to the display control device 114, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the number of winnings in the small hit, and the voice output device 226 displays the first ball. 2 A notification sound for notifying that the variable winning device 650 has been won is output. Note that, based on the determination result that the current small hit is a V pass small hit, the display on the third symbol display device 81 described above or the manner of notification by the audio output device 226 may be changed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention to the effect (display, alerting | reporting) in a small hit, and there exists an effect that the interest of a game can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3005 that the door passing command has not been received (S3005: No), it is then determined whether a V passing command has been received (S3007). If it is determined that a V-pass command has been received (S3007: Yes), a display V-pass command is set based on the received V-pass command (S3008), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (S3007: No), this processing is terminated.

  Here, when the display V passing command is set and transmitted to the display control device 114, the 3rd symbol display device 81 executes an effect display indicating that the big hit is executed after the small hit ends, The sound output device 226 outputs a sound congratulating the player. Even if the display V passing command is set, the big hit may be suddenly executed after the end of the small hitting without intentionally showing the player that effect. . By doing in this way, it becomes possible to provide an unexpected production for the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the variable display setting process (S2314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S2314). This variable display setting process (S2314) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S2314), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3201). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223e is not on (that is, is off) (S3201: No), the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, so the processing proceeds to S3207. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S3201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned off (S3202), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S2403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 57). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3203).

  Then, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3204). In the process of S3204, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the variation pattern selection process is executed (S3205). Details of this variation pattern selection process (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the processing of S3205 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S3206). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S3207). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (that is, is off) (S3207: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore this change display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S3207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S3208), and then in the process of S2406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 57), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3209).

  Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3210), and the process proceeds to S3211.

  In the processing of S3210, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3211). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the fluctuation pattern selection process (S3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S3205). This fluctuation pattern selection process (S3205) is a process executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON (S3301). If it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON (S3301: Yes), a continuous effect variation pattern selection process is executed next (S3305), and then this process ends. The continuous effect variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the continuous effect flag 223u is not set to ON (S3301: No), it is then determined whether the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is greater than 2 ( S3302).

  In the process of S3302, if it is determined that the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is not larger than 2 (less than 2) (S3302: No), the fluctuation pattern is based on the fluctuation pattern type acquired in the process of S3203. A variation pattern is selected from the selection table 222a (S3303). In the process of S3303, when the continuous effect flag 223u is not set to ON and the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is 2 or less, that is, in the winning information stored on hold, This process is executed when there is no winning information continuously won.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if it is determined that the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is larger than 2 (S3302: Yes), the precursor fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S3304), and then this process ends. .

  Here, the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is set to the number of reserved balls at that time when a winning command including information corresponding to the small hit A is received twice in succession (FIG. 59, S2612). Therefore, at the timing when the variation pattern selection process is executed, the case where it is determined that the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is 2 is the first (first) small hit A among the consecutive small hits A. The timing which selects the fluctuation pattern based on this, ie, the timing when a continuous production becomes executable is shown.

  Further, when the counter effect counter 223p is greater than 2, the state before the change corresponding to the consecutive small hits A is executed, that is, in the winning information stored on hold, continuously small. The winning winning information is included in the winning A, and the precursor variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern capable of executing the precursor effect as the variation pattern is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning command including information corresponding to the small hit A is received twice consecutively in the counter effect counter 223p, the number of reserved balls at that time is set. However, other configurations may be used. For example, based on the number of reserved balls when the condition for setting the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is satisfied, until the continuous effect can be executed (the fluctuation corresponding to the first small hit A among the consecutive small hits A) The number of fluctuations (until the pattern selection process is executed) may be set to the counter value of the sign effect counter 223p so that the sign effect can be executed until the counter value of the sign effect counter 223p becomes zero. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the precursor fluctuation pattern selection process (S3304) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this precursor fluctuation pattern selection processing (S3304). This precursor fluctuation pattern selection process (S3304) is a process executed in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is capable of executing a precursor effect ( In the state where the counter effect counter 223p is greater than 2), the process for setting the precursor effect to be executed is executed.

  When the precursor variation pattern selection process is executed, first, a variation pattern is selected from the precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i based on the variation pattern type acquired by the processing of S3203 of FIG. 65 (S3401). Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern selected in the process of S3401 has an SW effect (S3402).

  If it is determined that the selected variation pattern has the SW effect (S3402: Yes), the sign effect is selected based on the sign effect selection table 222d (S3403), and the SW valid time 2 is set (S3404). , The process proceeds to S3405. Various display modes to be displayed in the small area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 are defined in the sign effect selection table 222d. The counter value of the sign effect counter 223p, the current number of reserved balls, and the effect counter 223g The display mode is set as appropriate based on the counter value (see FIG. 17C).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3402, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern does not have the SW effect (S3402: No), the process of S3403 to S3404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3405, where the counter effect counter value 223p is counted. 1 is subtracted (S3405).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is 2 (S3406). If it is determined that the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is 2 (S3406: Yes), then the current number of held balls Is greater than 6 (S3407). In the process of S3407, when it is determined that the current number of reserved balls is greater than 6 (S3407: Yes), the continuous production in-progress flag 223u is set to on (S3408), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3406 that the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is not 2 (S3406: No), or in the process of S3407, the current number of reserved balls is not larger than 6 (6 or less). (S3407: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after the current variation pattern is selected, the counter value of the indication effect counter 223p is subtracted (S3405), and the subtracted counter value becomes 2 (S3406: Yes), that is, whether or not to turn on the continuous effect flag 223u based on the current number of reserved balls when the next fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first small hit A among the consecutive small hits A Has been decided.

  Next, the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3305) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this continuous effect variation pattern selection processing (S3305). This continuous effect change pattern selection process (S3305) is a process executed in the change pattern selection process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is capable of executing a continuous effect. This is a process for setting a continuous effect to be executed in the state where the continuous effect flag 223u is set to ON.

  Here, the outline of the process related to the continuous performance executed in the present embodiment will be described. First, based on the winning command received from the main control device 110, the range (the number of special symbol fluctuations and the number of small hit games) to be continuously produced and the target period (the special symbol variation time and the small bonus game time). ) Is calculated (assumed) in advance. Next, a small hit game in which V passage is possible within a range to be subjected to continuous performance and its variation are determined (V passage variation variation determination).

  Then, based on the variation pattern type (variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the range to be subjected to the continuous performance, and the determination result of the V passable variation determination, the continuous performance. The effect content (variation pattern) is selected, and the continuous effect based on the small hit opening command received from the main control device 110, the range to be subjected to the continuous effect, and the determination result of the V passable variation determination. Select the content of the play during the small hit game.

  By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform a series of effects with relevance for a plurality of special symbol changes and small hit games.

  In the present embodiment, since the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is different depending on the number of reserved balls, when the number of held balls changes during execution of a continuous effect (additional winning occurs) In this case, there is a possibility that a variation pattern command indicating a content different from the content calculated (assumed) in advance (the variation time of the special symbol) is transmitted from main controller 110.

  Therefore, if the previously calculated (assumed) content (special symbol variation time) and the variation pattern type (special symbol variation time) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 are different, continuous Since there is a possibility that the production content of the production and the actual game content (V passable variation determination) are different, the process of replacing the content of the continuous production is executed.

  By doing so, the content (variation time of the special symbol) calculated (assumed) in advance was different from the information (variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Even if it replaces the content of a continuous production, there exists an effect that a continuous production without a sense of incongruity can be provided.

  In addition, by using a configuration in which the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol does not change according to the number of reserved balls, the previously calculated (assumed) content (the variation time of the special symbol) and the main controller 110 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variation pattern type (the variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from is different.

  Returning to FIG. 68, the continuous effect variation pattern selection processing (S3305) will be described. When the continuous effect variation pattern selection process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON (S3501). The continuous effect type selected flag 223w is the current continuous effect. This is a flag that is set to ON when the referenced continuous performance type is selected, so that the continuous performance type is not reselected during one continuous performance.

  In the process of S3501, when it is determined that the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is not set to ON (S3501: No), that is, when the continuous effect type referred to in the current continuous effect is not selected, The continuous effect type selection process is executed (S3502), and then the process proceeds to S3503. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON (S3501: Yes), the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the continuous effect type selection process (S3502) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this continuous effect type selection process (S3502). This continuous effect type selection process (S3502) is a process executed in the continuous effect change pattern selection process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and each change during the continuous effect. Is a process for setting a continuous performance type that is referred to when a variation pattern corresponding to is selected.

  When the continuous effect type selection process is executed, first, the value stored in the small hits continuous number storage area 223o is set in the continuous effect counter 223v (S3601), and the value in the small hits continuous number storage area 223o is cleared. (S3602). After that, a V passable variation determination process is executed (S3603), and the process proceeds to S3604. The V-passable variation determination process is a process for determining a variation in which a small hit that allows V-passing is performed in each variation in which a continuous effect is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the V passable variation determination process (S3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this V-passable fluctuation determination process (S3603). This V passable variation determination process (S3603) is a process executed in the continuous effect type selection process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the V-passable fluctuation determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2 (S3701). If it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is 2 (S3701: Yes), the current and next (2 fluctuations) fluctuations are based on the information stored in the game specification storage area 222b. The opening timing of the door 650f based on is acquired (S3702), and then the process proceeds to S3704.

  Here, the processing executed in S3702 will be described in detail. When the continuous production in-progress flag 223u is set to ON in S3408 in FIG. 67, a continuous production variation pattern selection process is executed (S3301: Yes in FIG. 66). Then, a continuous effect type selection process is executed in the continuous effect change pattern selection process (S3502 in FIG. 68), and a V-passable change determination process is executed in the process (S3603 in FIG. 69). This V passing variable variation determination process is a process that is executed only when the continuous effect variation pattern selection process is first executed (a continuous effect type that is skipped when the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON). This is a process executed in the selection process).

  Therefore, in the process of S3701, the counter value of the counter during continuous effect 223v determined is the value set in S3601 of FIG. 69, that is, a value indicating how many fluctuations the current continuous effect is performed. Become. That is, in the process of S3701, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during the continuous effect is 2, the current continuous effect is an effect that is executed over two variations, while the continuous effect is performed in the process of S3701. When it is determined that the counter value of the middle counter 223v is not 2 (3), the current continuous effect is an effect executed over three variations.

  Therefore, in the process of S3702, which is executed when it is determined in the process of S3701 that the value of the counter 223v during the continuous performance is 2, the V passable fluctuation is determined with respect to the fluctuation of two fluctuations (current and next time). Get information to do. Here, in the process of S3702, the timing of opening the door 650f at the small hit A and the next variation pattern (variation time) are acquired from the game specification storage area 222b. Note that the current variation pattern (variation time) is extracted from the variation pattern type acquired in S3203 of FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a next fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), it is assumed that no new winning command is received (the number of reserved balls is not added) until the next fluctuation pattern is selected. Although the configuration is such that the variation pattern is acquired, other configurations may be adopted. For example, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, an assumed variation pattern may be acquired even when the number of reserved balls is added.

  Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. In the process of S3701, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is not 2 (3) (S3701: No), based on the information stored in the game specification storage area 222b, The opening timing of the door 650f based on the next and subsequent changes (3 changes) is acquired (S3703), and then the process proceeds to S3704. That is, in addition to the process of S3702, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second time (third variation) is acquired from the game specification storage area 222b.

  Next, in S3704, the V gate opening timing stored in the opening timing storage area 223k is acquired (S3704), and it is determined whether the V passable fluctuation is the current fluctuation (S3705). Here, the processing executed in S3705 will be described in detail.

  In the process of S3705, based on the information acquired in S3702 or S3703 and the information acquired in S3704, it is determined whether the V passable fluctuation is the current fluctuation. Specifically, based on the current variation pattern (for example, special variation C: variation time 4 seconds) and the small hit A door 650f opening timing (2.5 seconds to 4 seconds from the small hit A start (FIG. 17 ( a))) With the current fluctuation, it is calculated that the door 650f is opened 6.5 seconds to 8 seconds after the fluctuation is started. Then, from the next fluctuation pattern (for example, special fluctuation B: fluctuation time 5.5 seconds) and the small hit A door 650f opening timing (2.5 seconds to 4 seconds from the start of the small hit A) (FIG. 17 (a )), In the next fluctuation, it is calculated that the door 650f is opened 18 seconds to 19.5 seconds after the current fluctuation is started.

  Then, the period in which the door 650f is opened by the current fluctuation and the next fluctuation described above is compared with the period in which the V gate 650d stored in the opening timing storage area 223k is opened, and each period satisfies a predetermined condition. When it is satisfied, it is determined that the V passing change is possible. Note that the predetermined condition indicates a condition in which the door 650f opens at a timing at which it can pass through the V gate 650d in consideration of the time until the ball winning the door 650f passes through the V gate 650d. Specifically, the ball that has won the door 650f stays in the stopper (ball stop member) 650c, and the gate (gate stop member) 650c controls the operation to control the V gate 1 second after the door 650f is closed. It is configured to reach 650d. Specifically, the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position 0.5 seconds after the door 650f is closed, so that the ball staying in the stopper (ball stop member) 650c starts to flow down. Thereafter, the V gate 650d is reached after 0.5 seconds.

  Therefore, when the V gate 650d is in an open state (guidance state) one second after the end of the period in which the door 650f is open, the change is determined as a V passable change. In the present embodiment, since the ball won in the door 650f by the small hit A is retained by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c, the small hit A starts regardless of the timing of winning the door 650f. It is possible to reach the V gate 650d after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start (5 seconds after the start of the small hit), and the determination accuracy of the V passable fluctuation can be improved. Therefore, by making the content of the continuous performance suitable for the actual game result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the performance that gives distrust to the player.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the stopper 650c is provided. However, the stopper 650c may be omitted. In the case of adopting such a configuration, when determining the V passing variation, the opening period of the door 650f is compared with the opening period of the V gate 650d (the period in which the door is in the guiding state), and the opening period of the door 650f is compared. Of these, it is preferable to execute an effect that suggests the ratio of the period during which the ball can pass through the V gate 650d (the ratio of the period during which the ball that has won during the opening period of the door 650f can pass through the V gate 650d). . In this way, the player can grasp the possibility (expected degree) of passing through the V gate 650d from the contents of the performance, and can be glad about the result of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect to perform the.

  Further, by using such a configuration, the timing of reaching the V gate 650d is randomized by the ball play of the ball that has won the door 650f, so that the ball is intentionally fired so as to pass through the V gate 650d. This has the effect of making it difficult to provide a fair game to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. In the process of S3705, when it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is the current fluctuation (S3705: Yes), “current” is set in the V-passable fluctuation storage area 223m (S3706), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3705 that the V-passable fluctuation is not the current fluctuation (S3705: No), it is then determined whether the V-passable fluctuation is the next fluctuation (S3707).

  In the process of S3707, when it is determined that the V passable fluctuation is the next fluctuation (S3707: Yes), “next” is set in the V passable fluctuation storage area 223m (S3708), and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3707 that the V-passable fluctuation is not the next fluctuation (S3707: No), “next time” is set in the V-passable fluctuation storage area 223m, and this process ends ( S3709). If it is determined in the process of S3701 that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, the process of S3709 is performed when it is determined in S3707 that the V passable fluctuation is not the next fluctuation. This process is terminated without executing.

  Although not shown, if there is no change that is determined to be a V-passable change in the change in which the continuous effect is executed, the process is terminated without setting the V-passable change storage area 223m.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation that is a small hit that can pass V is determined by the V-passable variation determination process executed in the special symbol variation pattern selection process. Yes. In other words, the V passable variation determination process described in the present embodiment includes a function for determining whether the small hit corresponding to the special figure variation executed this time can pass V, and the winning information stored on hold. A function to determine whether there is a small hit that can pass V in (entrance information), and when there is a small hit that can pass V, when the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to that small hit is (after what rotation) It has a function to determine whether it is executed.

  Regarding the functions described above, one process does not need to have all, and each process may have a separate process.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. If the V passable variation determination process is executed in S3603, it is next determined whether the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is 2 (whether the current continuous performance is a continuous performance across two variations) ( S3604). Here, if it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is 2 (S3604: Yes), based on the contents stored in the V-passable variation storage area 223m by the V-passable variation determination process described above. Thus, it is determined whether or not the V passable fluctuation is “current” (S3605).

  In the process of S3605, when it is determined that the V passable variation is not “current” (S3605: No), 2 continuous effects B is selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e as a continuous effect type (S3606). Next, the flow proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3605 that the V-passable fluctuation is “current” (S3605: Yes), two continuous effects A are selected as the continuous effect types from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3607). ), The continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S3608). Then, the process proceeds to S3614.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3604, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous performance is not 2 (3) (S3604: No), next, whether the V passable fluctuation is “current” is determined. It is determined (S3609). If it is determined in the process of S3609 that the V-passable fluctuation is “current” (S3609: Yes), 3 consecutive effects A are selected as the continuous effect types from the continuous effect type selection table 222e (S3610). ), The continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3614.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3609 that the V-passable fluctuation is not “current” (S3609: No), it is then determined whether the V-passable fluctuation is “next” (S3611). Here, when it is determined that the V passable variation is “next time” (S3611: Yes), 3 continuous effects B are selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e as the continuous effect types (S3612), and the continuation flag is selected. 223q is set to ON (S3608), and the process proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is not “next time” (S3611: No), 3 consecutive effects C are selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e as the continuous effect types (S3612), and the process proceeds to S3614. To do. Next, after executing the process of S3606 or S3608, the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON, and this process ends.

  Although not shown, if there is no change that is determined to be V-passable in the change in which the continuous effect is executed, nothing is stored in the V-passable change storage area 223m, so the continuous effect type is selected. This process is terminated without doing so.

  Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON (S3503). Here, if it is determined that the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON (S3503: Yes), the variation from the continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g is changed based on the variation pattern acquired in S3203. A pattern is selected (S3504), SW valid time 1 is set (S3506), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the additional winning flag 223x is not set to ON (S3503: No), from the continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f based on the variation pattern acquired in S3203, A variation pattern is selected (S3505), SW valid time 1 is set (S3506), and this process ends.

  Although not shown, when the continuous effect type is not selected, that is, when there is no change that is determined to be V-passable in the change in which the continuous effect is executed, the same processing as S3303 in FIG. 66 is performed. Executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (small hit) continuously, it is possible (easy) to hit the ball in a specific area. Based on the determination result, a series of effects (continuous) can be executed using a continuous small hit period and a variable symbol display period corresponding to the small hit period. By configuring in this way, for example, the first small hit can not pass the sphere to the specific area (it is difficult), and the second small hit can pass the sphere to the specific area. When it is possible (easy) small hits, as an effect corresponding to the first small hit, this small hit is based on the fact that it is impossible (difficult) to pass a sphere through a specific area It is possible to execute an effect (for example, a chance continuation effect) based on the fact that it is not an effect but a next small hit that can pass a ball to a specific area (easy). Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of performing an effect based on a small hit that cannot provide a gaming state advantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress an effect that the player feels dissatisfied, There is an effect that a situation where a person gets bored with the game can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the frame button input monitoring / production process (S2307) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2307). This frame button input monitoring / production process (S2307) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 (frame left button 22a). Alternatively, it is a process of managing the time for validating the operation of the frame right button 22b) and setting a display command when the frame button 22 is operated within the valid time.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is executed, it is first determined whether the switch valid time 1 is greater than 0 (S3801). Here, in the process of S3801, when it is determined that the SW valid time 1 is not greater than 0 (0) (S3801: No), next, whether the SW valid time 2 is greater than 0 is determined. It is determined (S3806).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3801 that the SW effective time 1 is greater than 0 (S3801: Yes), the SW effective time 1 is decremented by 1 (S3802), and both SWs (the frame left button 22a and the frame right button) It is determined whether or not (both 22b) is pressed (S3803). If it is determined that both SWs are pressed (S3803: Yes), a display switch notice SW pressing command is set (S3804), the SW valid time 1 is reset to 0 (S3805), and this processing is performed. Exit. On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if it is determined that both SWs are not pressed (S3803: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  Next, in the process of S3806, when it is determined that the SW valid time 2 is greater than 0 (S3806: Yes), the SW valid time 2 is decremented by 1 (S3807), and either SW (the frame left button 22a or It is determined whether any of the frame right buttons 22b) is pressed (S3808). If it is determined that either SW has been pressed (S3808: Yes), a display addition notice SW pressing command is set (S3809), the SW valid time 2 is reset to 0 (S3810), This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3808, when it is determined that neither SW has been pressed (S3808: No), this process is ended as it is. Also, in the process of S3806, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not longer than 0 (0) (S3806: No), this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the SW effective time 1 is configured to be set while the continuous effect is being executed, while the SW effective time 2 is set while the precursor effect is being executed. It is comprised so that. Therefore, both SW effective times do not overlap. Therefore, when one SW effective time is set, the processing related to the other effective time is skipped, but a plurality of SW effective times overlap. In this case, each SW valid time process may be executed.

  Next, the V counter update process (S2311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the V counter update process (S2311). This V counter update process (S2311) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the V gate 650d is referred to the V gate scenario 222c. This is a process of updating the V counter 223t used for grasping the operation status of the V.

  When the V counter 223t is executed, it is first determined whether or not the V gate scenario 222c is set (S3901). Here, when it is determined that the V gate scenario 222c is not set (S3901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V gate scenario 222c is set (S3901: Yes), it is then determined whether the counter value of the V counter 223t is 5000 (S3902).

  In the process of S3902, if it is determined that the counter value of the V counter 223t is 5000 (S3902: Yes), the counter value of the V counter 223t is set to 1 (S3904), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3902 that the counter value of the V counter 223t is not 5000 (S3902: No), 1 is added to the counter value of the V counter 223 (S3903), and this process ends.

  As described above, in the V counter update process in the present embodiment, the V gate is referred to with reference to the V gate scenario 222c defined in accordance with the V gate 650d in which a certain operation is repeatedly executed at intervals of 5 seconds. In order to grasp the operation status of 650d, when the counter value of the V counter 223t reaches 5000 (5 seconds), the counter value is added again from 1. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to reduce the information amount prescribed | regulated by V gate scenario 222c.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S4001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S4102, the program is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 73) (S4105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S4001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified or complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all the remaining boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S4102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S4101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S4101. The processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S4102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S4003, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S4004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), The image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 and the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. Are transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S4005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 88A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S6302 in FIG. 88A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the simple command determination process (FIG. 75) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn. 75 (b) S4308) and simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 75 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning prize) to the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance A64b, or the second ball entrance B640b, When the start instruction of the change effect is given from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the change image at power-on is immediately displayed during the change effect period. It can be displayed and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S4005, interrupt permission is set (S4006). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 24) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S4302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S4303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S4303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S4304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4303) or the simple display setting process (S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed at 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S4309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S4304.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S4401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S4403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S4404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4405), the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S4405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S4501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502).

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504), both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4505), and this process is terminated.

  By executing the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77A), the display setting process sets the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4501 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4504. The drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the changed display data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, in S4502 The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing, and the necessary sprite image data is stored in advance in the set variable display data table. Character ROM 234 As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S4404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4406). If there is a display variation type command (S4406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4407), and the processing returns to S4401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 77 (b), details of the stop type command processing (S4407) will be described. FIG. 77 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (shown by the display stop type command) is determined (S4601), the stop type table and the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B). ) Is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S4602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S4603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is described. In the task process (S4304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S4603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S4602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the process of S4406 (S4406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notice effect command among the unprocessed commands (S4408). If there is a winning related command (S4408: Yes), the winning related command processing is executed (S4409), and the processing returns to S4401.

  Details of the hit-related command process (S4409) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the hit related command processing. This hit-related command processing includes hit-related commands (display jackpot opening command, display round number command, display last round command, display jackpot interval command, display jackpot ending command, display, received from the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for executing processing corresponding to a small hitting opening command, a display small hitting ending command, a display door passing command, and a display V passing command.

  In the hit-related command processing (S4409), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S4701), and if there is a display jackpot opening command (S4701: Yes). Then, the jackpot opening command process is executed (S4702), and the process proceeds to S4703.

  Here, the details of the jackpot opening command process (S4702) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening command process (S4702). The jackpot opening command processing (S4702) is for executing processing corresponding to the jackpot opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot opening command process, first, the jackpot opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set jackpot opening display data table (S3003). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3005), the jackpot opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot opening command in the unprocessed new command in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), the process of S4702 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4703. In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S4703). If there is a display round number command (S4703: Yes), the round number command process is executed. In step S4704, the process proceeds to step S4705.

  Details of the round number command processing (S4704) will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S4704). The round number command processing (S4704) is for executing processing corresponding to the round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4901). Thereafter, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4902). Then, based on the set round number display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S4903). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4905), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display round number command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S4703 (S4703: No), the process of S4704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4705. In the process of S4705, it is determined whether or not there is a final round command for display among unprocessed commands (S4705). If there is a final round command for display (S4705: Yes), the final round command process is executed. In step S4706, the process proceeds to step S4707.

  Details of the final round command process (S4706) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the final round command process (S4706). This final round command processing (S4706) is for executing processing corresponding to the final round command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the final round command process, first, a final round display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Thereafter, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5002). Then, based on the set final round display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S5003). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5005), the final round command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no final round command for display among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S4705 (S4705: No), the process of S4706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4707. In the processing of S4707, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed commands (S4707). If there is a display jackpot interval command (S4707: Yes), the jackpot interval command processing is executed. In step S4708, the process proceeds to step S4709.

  Here, the details of the jackpot interval command process (S4708) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing (S4708). This jackpot interval command processing (S4708) is for executing processing corresponding to the jackpot interval command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot interval command processing, first, a jackpot interval display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot interval display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set jackpot interval display data table (S5103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5105), the big hit interval command processing is ended, and the hit related command processing is returned.

  Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4707 that there is no display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed new commands (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4709. In the processing of S4709, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot ending command among unprocessed commands (S4709). If there is a display jackpot ending command (S4709: Yes), the jackpot ending command processing is executed. In step S4710, the process proceeds to step S4711.

  Here, the details of the jackpot ending command process (S4710) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81A is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending command process (S4710). The jackpot ending command processing (S4710) is for executing processing corresponding to the jackpot ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot ending command process, first, a jackpot ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Thereafter, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5202). Then, based on the set jackpot ending display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S5203). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5204). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5205), the jackpot ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4709 that there is no display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed new commands (S4709: No), the process of S4710 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4711. In the processing of S4711, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit opening command among the unprocessed commands (S4711). If there is a display small hit opening command (S4711: Yes), the small hit opening command The process is executed (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4713.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81 (b), details of the small hit opening command process (S4712) will be described. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the small hit opening command process (S4712). This small hit opening command process (S4712) is for executing a process corresponding to the small hit opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the small hit opening command process, first, a small hit opening display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the small hitting opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set small hitting opening display data table (S5303). ). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5305), the small hit opening command process is terminated, and the hit related command process is returned.

  Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display small hit opening command in the unprocessed new command in the process of S4711, the process of S4712 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4713. In the process of S4713, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hitting ending command among unprocessed commands (S4713). If there is a display small hitting ending command (S4713: Yes), the small hitting ending command is determined. The process is executed (S4714), and the process proceeds to S4715.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 82A, details of the small hitting ending command process (S4714) will be described. FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing the small hitting ending command process (S4714). This small hitting ending command processing (S4714) is for executing processing corresponding to the small hitting ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the small hitting ending command process, first, a small hitting ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Thereafter, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5402). Then, based on the set small hitting ending display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S5403). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5405), the small hitting ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display small hit ending command in the unprocessed new command in the process of S4713 (S4713: No), the process of S4714 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4715. In the process of S4715, it is determined whether or not there is a display door passing command among unprocessed commands (S4715). If there is a display door passing command (S4715: Yes), the door passing command process is executed. In step S4716, the process proceeds to step S4717.

  Here, the details of the door passing command process (S4716) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing the door passing command process (S4716). This door passage command processing (S4716) is for executing processing corresponding to the door passage command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the door passing command process, first, a door passing display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Thereafter, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5502). Then, based on the set door passage display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S5503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5505), the door passing command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display door passage command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S4715 (S4715: No), the process of S4716 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4717. In the process of S4717, it is determined whether or not there is a display V pass command among unprocessed commands (S4717). If there is a display V pass command (S4717: Yes), the V pass command process is executed. In step S4718, the process ends.

  Here, the details of the V passing command process (S4718) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the V pass command process (S4718). This V pass command process (S4718) is for executing a process corresponding to the V pass command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the V pass command process, first, a V pass display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Thereafter, the Null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S5602). Then, based on the set V passage display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S5603). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5605), the V passing command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

  Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined in S4717 that there is no display V passing command among the unprocessed new commands (S4717: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4408 that there is no hit-related command (S4408: No), it is then determined whether there is an SW-related command among unprocessed commands (S4410). If there is (S4410: Yes), SW-related command processing is executed (S4411), and the processing returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the SW-related command processing (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing SW-related command processing. This SW-related command processing is processing for executing processing corresponding to the SW-related commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 (switching display both SW pressing command, additional display notice SW pressing command).

  In the SW-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a switching display both SW pressing command among unprocessed commands (S5701), and if there is a switching display both SW pressing command (S5701: Yes), In order to execute (display) both SW press display effects, the process proceeds to S5702.

  In the process of S5702, the both SW press display data table corresponding to the switch display both SW press command is determined, and the display data table buffer 233d is switched from the switch timing pointer value (S5702). Then, the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S5703), and the process proceeds to S5704.

  By the processing of S5702, the notice display effect is easily set by combining the SW display data table corresponding to both SW display pressing commands for switching display with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. be able to. When combining, the display contents defined in the both SW press display data table are added to each address after the address corresponding to the switching timing (value of the pointer 233f). . That is, in the both SW press display data table, the display content after the switching timing is defined for each elapsed time. By configuring in this way, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently as compared with the case where addresses for all the fluctuation times are prepared in the both SW press display data table.

  If it is determined in the process of S5701 that there is no switch display dose SW pressing command among the unprocessed commands (S5701: No), the process proceeds to S5704.

  In the process of S5704, it is determined whether or not there is an additional display notice SW pressing command among the unprocessed commands (S5704). If there is an additional display notice SW pressing command in the process of S5704 (S5704: Yes), the process proceeds to S5705 in order to execute (display) the notice SW pressing effect.

  In the process of S5705, a notice SW pressing display data table corresponding to the additional display notice SW pressing command is determined and additionally set in the display data table buffer 233d from the current pointer value (S5705). Then, the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5706), and this process is terminated.

  By the process of S5705, the advance SW press display data table corresponding to the advance display advance SW press command is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, so that the advance SW press effect can be easily performed. Can be set. When the composition is performed, the display content defined in the notice SW press display data table is added to each address after the address (value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the currently executed (displayed) effect. It is configured as follows. That is, the display content is specified for each elapsed time in the advance SW press display data table. With this configuration, the notice SW pressing effect can be easily added and displayed from the time when the additional infant notice SW pressing command is notified.

  Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4410 that there is no SW-related command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and the back image change. If there is a command (S4412: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S4413), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 85A, details of the rear image change command processing (S4413) will be described. FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6303) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S5801). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, back B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the image type is set to OFF (S5802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S5801 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S5802. . If the specified back image type is the back B, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Then, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a back image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing (S4304), if it is specified that either the back A or the back B is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination set in S5802 is set. The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified from the flag, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the back image range is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S4412 that there is no rear image change command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S4414). If (S4414: Yes), the error command process is executed (S4415), and the process returns to S4401.

  Details of the error command process (S4415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S5902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S5902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S5902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S4414 (S4414: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4416), and the processing returns to S4401.

  In the process of S4401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes). ), The processing of S4402 to S4416 is executed again. The processes in steps S4401 to S4416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. If it is determined in step S4401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S4401: No). ), The command determination process is terminated.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the simple command determination process (S4308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 77 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, a display data table corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4501. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the details of the above-described display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6001: No). In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processing of S6002 to S6004 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6001: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S6002), and S6003 to S6004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S6004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87A is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6101).

  In the task processing (S4304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 86. After the warning image setting process (S6004) or in the process of S6003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6003: No), the process proceeds to S6005.

  In S6005, pointer update processing is executed (S6005). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87B is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6203). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S6203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6205), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S6206, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6202: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S6006 together with the warning image previously expanded, and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S6008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S6009).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6009: Yes), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S6010), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6011). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S4304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S6015, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on in the processing of S6009 (S6009: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S6016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S6017), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6018). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S6016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S6016: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the image of the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 88A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S6302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S6301, that is, if it is off (S6301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b). FIG. 88B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S6401), and if a transfer instruction has been transmitted (S6401: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S6402). In the process of S6402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S6402 (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to S6403. Also, as a result of the process of S6401, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

  In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6403). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S6403 (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 75B) and the simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 75B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 85) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 86 and 87) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 89) (see S6301: No in FIG. 88A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S6303) that is a process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the display setting process (S4303) executed earlier is used. Information described at the indicated address is acquired (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6502). If it is transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S6503, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to step S6505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S6502 (S6502: No), the processes of S6503 and S6504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S6506).

  In the process of S6506, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S6506 that the transfer process has not ended (S6506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to S6507. Also, as a result of the processing in S6505, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6505: No), the processing proceeds to S6507.

  In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507). If the transfer start flag is on (S6507: Yes), the transfer start flag is present because there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6503 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6507: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S6509).

  If the back image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S6510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S6511). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

  In the process of S6509, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S6509, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The determination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6513 (S6513: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6513 (S6513: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S6514). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6515), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the above drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information necessary for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S6601). That is, in the process of S6601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S6602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the variable winning means (second variable winning device 650) that allows the ball to win when the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result (small hit). ), And in the variable ball entry means, a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) that gives a player a privilege when the ball passes, a guidance state in which the ball can pass to the specific area, and difficulty in passing Guidance means (V gate 650d) that can be varied at a predetermined interval in a restricted state is provided. And, when winning continuously for a specific lottery result, at least one of the consecutive lottery results continuously winning is configured such that the ball is in a gaming state that easily passes through the specific area. Yes.

  As a result, when a specific lottery result is continuously won for a player, it becomes possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous than when a specific lottery result is won alone. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to winning the lottery result.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a winning is made consecutively for a small lottery (small winning A) that is a specific lottery result, that is, when a winning is made consecutively for a specific lottery result, the ball has a specific area. Although the configuration in which a small hit game (advantageous privilege game) that is easy to pass through is easily executed is shown, if the advantage game is easily executed by winning a specific lottery result a plurality of times, the present embodiment A configuration other than the configuration used may be used.

  For example, when a specific lottery result is won a plurality of times in a predetermined order, an advantageous bonus game may be easily executed. In addition, as the predetermined order, a predetermined order such as a case where the specific lottery result used in the present embodiment is continuously won a plurality of times, or a case where the specific lottery result and losing are alternately repeated is used. In particular, a lottery is included in a specific lottery result. In particular, by setting the order including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out as a predetermined order, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. Since there is a possibility that it becomes easy, there is an effect that the player can always be expected.

  Furthermore, in the case of winning consecutive small hits, the total time of the game time of the small hit game and the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the second small hit among the consecutive small hits is the V gate 650d. It is configured not to be an integral multiple of the operation cycle.

  As a result, when consecutive small hits occur, the continuous small hits do not cause the sphere to flow down at the same timing with respect to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. That is, by continuously generating small hit games, it is possible to make the ball flow down at different timings with respect to the V gate 650d operating at a predetermined operation cycle. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a more advantageous gaming state when winning a small hit game continuously than when winning a small hit game alone. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation due to the performance.

  In the present embodiment, the time corresponding to the integral multiple of the operation period of the V gate 650d is the total time of the game time of the small hit game and the change time of the second special figure change display among the consecutive small hits. On the other hand, the V gate 650d is configured to be different by at least the time (1.5 seconds) during which the V gate is in the induction state.

  As a result, among the consecutive small hit games, the timing at which the ball flows down to the V gate 650d in the first small hit game is V in the second small hit game when the V gate 650d is in the restricted state. The timing at which the ball flows down to the gate 650d can increase the probability that the V gate 650d is in a guided state, and if the player wins a small hit game continuously, it will win the small hit game alone. It is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to consecutive winning of winning.

  It should be noted that the difference time is preferably different from the integral multiple of the operation period of the V gate 650d by at least the time (1.5 seconds) during which the V gate 650d is in the induction state, but may be less than that. . As such a configuration, for example, when the operation period (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d is different from the time (1.5 seconds) for which the V gate 650d is in the induction state (for example, 1 second). It may be configured to make a difference in one operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d by winning a small hit successively for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times).

  By configuring in this way, for example, when the small hit game is continued five times, among the consecutive small hit games, a small hit game that can pass V is executed at least once. There is an effect that when a player wins a consecutive small win, it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when a single winner is won.

  In this embodiment, a period that is not an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) during which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state is set as the operation period of the V gate 650d. In this way, for example, in a continuous small hit game, the timing at which the V gate 650d is in the guiding state for the time of the ball flow down to the V gate 650d with respect to the previous small hit game (1.5 seconds) Min) When the small hit game to be different is continued a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) (when the total difference is one cycle or more of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d), the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is also different. The timing at which the ball flows down to the V gate 650d in the small hit game can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous gaming state can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol change corresponding to the consecutively won winning jackpot is executed, if the predetermined condition (seven reserved balls) is satisfied, the winning winning jackpot is the player. Is provided so as to provide an advantageous gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to always satisfy the predetermined condition, and to improve the operation of the game.

  As the predetermined condition, the present embodiment shows that there are seven reserved balls, but other conditions may be set, or the number of reserved balls satisfying the predetermined condition may be changed. In addition, a requirement other than the number of reserved balls may be set as a predetermined condition. For example, it may be set as a predetermined condition that a lottery result of a special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result and a gaming state is different from a normal gaming state. Alternatively, it may be determined as a predetermined condition that it is during a predetermined period (for example, a period until the change of the special symbol is executed 50 times) after the end of the specific gaming state such as the jackpot game.

  Even if comprised in this way, a player will play a game eagerly so that predetermined conditions may be satisfy | filled, and there exists an effect that operation of a game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when winning continuously for a small hit, it is determined (easy) that the ball can pass through a specific area, and based on the determination result, a continuous small hit period And a series of effects (continuous) can be executed using a variable symbol display period corresponding to the small hits. By configuring in this way, for example, the first small hit can not pass the sphere to the specific area (it is difficult), and the second small hit can pass the sphere to the specific area. When it is possible (easy) small hits, as an effect corresponding to the first small hit, this small hit is based on the fact that it is impossible (difficult) to pass a sphere through a specific area It is possible to execute an effect (for example, a chance continuation effect) based on the fact that it is not an effect but a next small hit that can pass a ball to a specific area (easy). Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of performing an effect based on a small hit that cannot provide a gaming state advantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress an effect that the player feels dissatisfied, There is an effect that a situation where a person gets bored with the game can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case where the small hits executed when a specific lottery result is obtained, it is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous gaming state than the case where the small hits are executed alone. Any configuration that can provide a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hits are executed alone based on the fact that the small hits are executed a plurality of times is sufficient.

  For example, a gaming state that is more advantageous than a case where a small hit is executed alone based on a plurality of small hits being executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (for example, the upper limit number that is held and stored eight times). You may comprise so that provision is possible. By doing in this way, there exists an effect that the fall of the game willingness by having frequently won the small win can be suppressed.

  Further, it is more advantageous than the case where the small hits are executed alone based on the fact that the small hits are executed a plurality of times in accordance with a predetermined order (for example, execution is performed so that the small hits and the disengages are alternately performed). It may be configured to be able to provide a different gaming state. By doing in this way, there exists an effect that the fall of the game willingness by having frequently won the small win can be suppressed. Furthermore, by prescribing a predetermined order in combination with small hits and misses, it is possible to provide a gaming state advantageous to the player even when the lottery results are lost as multiple special symbols. There is an effect that can be done.

  In addition, it is more advantageous than the case where small hits are executed alone based on the fact that the small hits are executed a plurality of times in accordance with a predetermined order (for example, execution is performed so that the small hits and disengages are alternated). When a special game state can be provided, the special symbol variation time corresponding to a departure is similar to the special symbol special variation time corresponding to the small hit described in this embodiment (special variations B to C). A special variation time may be set in the control unit so that the timing at which a plurality of small hits are executed is different from the opening timing of the guiding means. Thereby, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, there is a possibility that a gaming state advantageous to the player is provided. Therefore, apart from the special symbol lottery result, the player can play the game while expecting whether an advantageous gaming state will be provided, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored early. effective.

  In this case, it is preferable to unify (at least partially unify) the special variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit and the special variation of the special symbol corresponding to the loss. As a result, when the small hits are consecutive and when the small hits are executed a plurality of times in accordance with a predetermined order (for example, executed so that the small hits and disengages are alternated) The same effect can be executed as the symbol variation effect, and the capacity of display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

  More specifically, the fluctuation time is 5.5 seconds when the number of balls stored on the hold is 5 to 6 in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202c for withdrawal that is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. A special variation pattern (a special variation pattern for detachment) is defined. By configuring in this way, for example, while the number of balls stored on hold is reduced as 7 → 6 → 5, a special order in the order of small hit A (first time) → off → small hit A (second time). When the symbol lottery is executed, after the first small hit A is completed, the deviation fluctuation display (5.5 seconds) is executed, and then the small hit A fluctuation display (5.5 seconds). ) Later, a small hit A is executed. Therefore, the interval between the first small hitting A winning ball V gate arrival timing and the second small hitting A winning ball V gate arrival timing is 17 seconds. Since the operation period of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, the second small hitting A winning ball V gate arrival timing of the second small hitting A is the timing of the V gate 650d. The timing differs by 2 seconds (delayed by 2 seconds) with respect to the operation cycle.

  In the above-described example, the special symbol variation pattern (variation time) is shown to be unified between the special symbol lottery result and the small hitting result. However, the special symbol variation pattern in the case of the special symbol variation is shown. As the (variation time), a variation pattern having a variation time that is a total time of the special variation B (5.5 seconds) and the game time (6 seconds) of the small hit A may be used. By doing so, even if a deviation variation is executed in a small hit like in the above-described example, the time required for the small variation in the deviation variation (the variation time of the special symbol and the small hit game time) ). Therefore, the same continuous performance time can be secured when the special symbol lottery results are in the order of small hit A → off → small hit A and when the small hit A is won three times in succession. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by sharing the continuous effects.

  In addition, by making it difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol during the continuous production is a small hit or missed, it is possible to give the player expectations until the end of the continuous production There is.

  As described above, the illustrated configuration shows a case where a lottery result of a special symbol other than small hits is lost. However, the lottery result is not limited to, for example, a special variation B may be small hits (small hits B to C) that are not set. In this case, it is better to unify the small hit game times of the small hits B to C with the small hit A and to make the continuous production common.

  Further, in this embodiment, by setting the special variation time as the variation time of the special symbol, when the small hitting is executed continuously (when the small hitting is executed a plurality of times), the small hitting is performed independently. Although it is configured to be able to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous than when executed, other configurations may be used, for example, a door 650f (variable means) that is opened when a small hit is executed. The opening period and the opening timing may be changed, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (guidance means) may be changed, or the operation timing of the stopper 650c may be changed.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when a small hit is executed a plurality of times, a special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is set in advance so that one of the small hits is a small hit that can pass V. However, as another configuration, when the small hit is executed a plurality of times, the operation pattern of the V gate 650d may be set so that one of the small hits can pass V. . Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, by providing special fluctuations B to C as fluctuation patterns when the result of the special symbol lottery is the small hit A, the small hit is obtained when the small hit A is continuously won. The opening timing of the door 650f of the second variable prize-winning device 650 that is opened by means of the state that the V gate 650d provided in the second variable prize-winning device 650 can pass the sphere through the V discharge channel 650e3 that is a specific area. It is configured to be shifted with respect to the timing when the guidance state is set, and when winning a small hit A in succession, a big hit via the small hit game is easily given.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as a small hitting type to be selected when the special symbol lottery results in the small hitting, the special symbol variation pattern is changed by 8 rotations after the small hitting game is ended. Is selected by winning the small hit D, and a small hit E that allows a special variation pattern to be selected only three times after the small hit ends. As a possible special variation pattern, a variation pattern having a short variation time (1 second) is selected. The operation period of the V gate 650d is changed from 5 seconds to 10 seconds.

  By using such a configuration, the operation of opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 by the small hit game can be executed a plurality of times within the operation period (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d. Therefore, the door 650f of the second variable prize-winning device 650 can be intentionally opened at different timings with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, and when a small hit frequently occurs, a big win through the small hit game is given. This is advantageous in that it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the contents in various tables stored in the ROM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are partially changed. This is a point different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a new counter is added to the R-34th AM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. About another structure, it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 91A, the ROM 202 of the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that the contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c and the variation pattern selection table 202e are changed. ing. Also, the numerical values set in the jackpot scenario table 2202f and the jackpot scenario table 2202g are changed.

  FIG. 91 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 91B, the RAM 203 of the second embodiment has a special figure special fluctuation counter 203t and a universal special fluctuation counter 203u added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92A, the first small hit type selection table 202c in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 92A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c in the second embodiment. The first small hit type selection table 202c includes a special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 and a special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 in which different small hit types from the first embodiment described above are defined. .

  FIG. 92B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 of the second embodiment. The special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 is different from the above-described special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 of the first embodiment in that a small hit D and a small hit E are added as small hit types, and various small hit types. Is different in that the value of the small hitting type counter value to which is set is changed, and the other configuration is the same as the type selection table 202c1 for special figure 1 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), in the case of a small hit of the first special symbol (special drawing 1), in the small hit type counter C5, a small hit when the random number value is “0 to 34”. The type is “small hit A”. The small hit type when the random value is “35-40” is “small hit B”. The small hit type when the random value is “41 to 390” is “small hit C”. The small hit type when the random number value is “391 to 395” is “small hit D”. The small hit type when the random number value is “396 to 398” is “small hit E”.

  Here, among the small hit types, “small hit D” and “small hit E” added in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, when “small hit D” is selected, the ball (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is set to 0.1 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the ball is difficult to win the second variable winning device. An open scenario in which the operation for releasing the second is performed twice is set, and “big hit D” is set as a big hit type given when passing through the V discharge flow path 650e3 which is a specific region (when passing V). . Further, after the small hit game of the small hit D is completed, a game state in which a special variation pattern described later is set as a special symbol variation pattern is given until the special symbol variation display is executed eight times.

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. However, when a special variation pattern is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Thus, it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variation display a plurality of times in a short time. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the small hit game multiple times within the operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d operates, and each timing at which the door 650 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the small hit game. It can be varied with respect to the operation cycle in which the V gate 650d operates. In other words, the small hit game that has been generated a plurality of times is to open the door 650f of the second variable prize winning device 650 at the same timing (for example, the timing when the V gate 650d is in a restricted state) with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. It becomes possible to prevent.

  By configuring in this way, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a small hit game from occurring frequently at a timing when V passage is impossible (difficult) and a player's willingness to play to be reduced.

  In addition, when “small hit E” is selected, an open pattern similar to the above “small hit D” and “big hit D” is set as the big hit type given when V passes. Further, after the small hit game of the small hit E is completed, a game state in which a special variation pattern, which will be described later, is set as the normal symbol variation pattern is given until the normal symbol variation display is executed three times.

  The normal symbol variation pattern (variation time) is set to 180 seconds in the normal gaming state (S1017 in FIG. 99), but 0.5 seconds is set when the special variation pattern is set. As a result, the normal symbol is easily hit in the normal gaming state, so that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance device 640 can be easily opened, and the game ball can enter the second entrance B640b. It becomes.

  As a result, in a normal game state in which the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are alternately stored in a reserved state by the first pitching device 64, the game ball is allowed to enter the second entrance B640b. As a result, the special symbol 2 can be continuously stored. The special symbol 2 is set to have a higher ratio of selecting the small hit A, which is a small hit that makes it easier for the second variable winning device to enter the ball with respect to the special symbol 1 (FIG. 92 (b), c)), it is possible to provide a state where it is easy for a player to give a jackpot via a jackpot.

  In the second embodiment, the contents of the operation scenario (small hit scenario) of the small hit A to the small hit C are different from the first embodiment described above. The detailed explanation of the operation scenario will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, but the small hit scenario a2 corresponding to the small hit A is required for the small hit game more than the small hit scenario a used in the first embodiment described above. It is defined that the time is shortened, and the small hit scenario b2 corresponding to the small hit B or the small hit C is shorter than the small hit scenario b used in the first embodiment described above. It is prescribed.

  FIG. 92 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 of the second embodiment. The special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 is obtained by adding small hits D and small hits E as small hit types to the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 of the first embodiment described above, and various small hit types. The difference is that the value of the small hitting type counter value to which is set is changed, and the other configuration is the same as the type selection table 202c2 for special figure 2 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  As shown in FIG. 92 (c), in the case of the small hit of the second special symbol (special drawing 2), in the small hit type counter C5, the small hit when the random number value is “0 to 85” The type is “small hit A”. The small hit type when the random value is “86 to 90” is “small hit B”. The small hit type when the random value is “91 to 390” is “small hit C”. The small hit type when the random number value is “391 to 395” is “small hit D”. The small hit type when the random number value is “396 to 398” is “small hit E”.

  As described above, also in the second embodiment, the ratio of the small hit A, which is the small hit that the ball easily wins to the second variable winning device 650, is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Is set.

  Next, the variation pattern selection table 202e in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e in the second embodiment. The variation pattern selection table 202e includes a big hit variation pattern selection table 2202e1, a deviation variation pattern selection table 2202e2, and a small hit variation pattern selection table 2202e3 in which variation patterns different from those of the first embodiment are defined. have.

  Although the detailed description of each variation pattern table will be described later, the variation pattern table used in the second embodiment has a special variation pattern set to the variation pattern table used in the first embodiment described above. Is different from the point that the special variation D to be selected is added and the special variations A to D cannot be selected.

  FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern selection table 2202e1. In the jackpot variation pattern selection table 2202e1, various jackpot variation patterns are selected based on whether or not a special variation pattern is set and the value of the variation type counter CS1. The special variation pattern setting is given after the end of the small hit when D is selected as a result of the special symbol lottery. When the special variation pattern is set, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. Regardless, the special variation D (1 second) is selected.

  FIG. 93C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation variation pattern selection table 2202e2. Similarly to the jackpot variation pattern selection table 2202e1, the deviation variation pattern selection table 2202e2 is configured such that various jackpot variation patterns are selected based on whether or not a special variation pattern is set and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit variation pattern selection table 2202e3. Similar to the big hit variation pattern selection table 2202e1 described above, the small hit variation pattern selection table 2202e3 is configured such that various big hit variation patterns are selected based on the presence / absence of a special variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Has been. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the small hit D is won, a special period (until the special symbol fluctuates eight times in the second embodiment) after the small hit game ends is special fluctuation. A pattern is set, and a special symbol can be changed a plurality of times in a short period (a period of one operation period of the V gate).

  Therefore, a small hit game can be executed a plurality of times within a short period, and the ball can flow down to a specific area in the small hit game at different timings with respect to the operation period of the V gate.

  Next, the small hit scenario table 2202g in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario table 2202g in the second embodiment. The small hit scenario table 2202g differs from the small hit scenario table 202g of the first embodiment described above in that the small hit scenario a202g1 is changed to the small hit scenario a2202g1, and the small hit scenario b202g2 is changed to the small hit scenario b2202g2. , And the small hit scenario b2202g2 is defined as a selection scenario corresponding to the small hit D and the small hit E, and the other configurations are the same, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The small hit scenario a2202g1 is different from the small hit scenario a202g1 of the first embodiment described above in that the interval of each scenario is shortened, and the contents of each scenario are the same. The interval between scenarios will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 95B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario a2202g1. In the small hit scenario a2202g1, the opening period is shortened to 0.1 seconds with respect to the small hit scenario a202g1, and in the ending period, the period from when the V passage determination is executed until the ending ends is 0.1 second. It is specified that the period of the entire scenario is 2.7 seconds. In addition, since the period when the door solenoid 650f2 is set to ON is the same as the small hit scenario a202g1 of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  By defining in this way, in the small hit game in which the small hit scenario a2202g1 is selected, the small hit game of 2.7 seconds is executed.

  FIG. 95 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario b2202g2. The small hit scenario b2202g2 is the same as the small hit scenario b202g2 of the first embodiment described above, the number of times the door opens and closes is reduced by two, the opening period is shortened to 0.1 second, and the end period is The period from the execution of the V passage determination to the end of the ending is shortened to 0.1 seconds. Other configurations are the same as those of the small hit scenario b202g2 of the first embodiment described above, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the game time during the small hit game is a small hit of 2.7 seconds for the small hit A, and a small hit of 2.5 seconds for the small hits B to E. Run a game. By configuring in this way, it is configured so that more special symbol variations can be executed in a short period of time.

  In the second embodiment, the small hit game time is set in advance, but the small hit game time may be changed according to the game state. For example, the length of the opening period and the ending period during the small hit game may be changed depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  Next, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d and the timing of the special symbol game executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of the special symbol game and the operation of the V gate 650d when the normal variation pattern in the second embodiment is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the second embodiment, the V gate 650d is variably controlled so that one operation period is 10 seconds. On the other hand, as a result of lottery of special symbols, the variation pattern selected when winning the small hit A is 10 seconds at the shortest (see FIG. 94). And when the small hit A is won, the small hit scenario a2 in which the game time is 2.7 seconds is set (see FIG. 95B).

  In the second embodiment configured as described above, a plurality of small hit A games are not executed within one operation period (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled in the normal game state. It is configured so that the sphere does not reach the V gate 650d a plurality of times within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled.

  FIG. 96B shows a special symbol when the special variation pattern in the second embodiment is selected, that is, when the special symbol lottery is won as a result of the special symbol lottery and special symbol special variation is executed. It is a timing chart which showed typically the timing of a game and operation of V gate 650d.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (b), when the special symbol (special symbol) lottery by the main controller 110 is won, the special symbol is displayed after the small hit D game is executed for 2.5 seconds. Special variation is performed. For this special figure special fluctuation, a special fluctuation D having a fluctuation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 93A to 93B and FIG. 94). Therefore, multiple special figure fluctuations can be executed within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the small hit A is won, the small hit scenario a2 in which the game time is defined as 2.7 seconds is set (see FIG. 95B). A plurality of small hit A games can be executed within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the gate 650d is variably controlled.

  As a result, by executing the small hit A game a plurality of times within a predetermined period during which special figure special fluctuation is executed (in this embodiment, the special figure fluctuates eight times), the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is reached. On the other hand, it is possible to execute a small hit game at different timings. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball won in the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit A game passes through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5).

  In the second embodiment, by making it possible to execute a plurality of small hit games within the operation period (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d, a single operation period (10) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled. (Second), a plurality of timings for the sphere to reach the V gate 650d are provided. Even in other configurations, the V gate 650d is variably controlled within one operation cycle (10 seconds). In addition, the timing at which the sphere reaches the V gate 650d may be provided a plurality of times. For example, in the case of having a plurality of small hits at different timings when the ball reaches the V gate 650d, even if a plurality of small hits are not executed within the operation period (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d, The small hit may be set so that the timing at which the sphere reaches the V gate 650d is provided a plurality of times within the operation period (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a period in which a plurality of small hits are advantageously executed (a period in which special figure special variation is executed) is provided based on a lottery result of special symbols. Therefore, when a player wins a small hit game multiple times, it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when winning a small hit game alone. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to the situation.

  In the second embodiment, the special game state (special figure special variation) is set when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the specific lottery result (small hit D). A specific gaming state may be set when other specific conditions are satisfied. For example, the specific gaming state may be set on condition that the number of special symbols stored on hold reaches an upper limit. Further, the specific gaming state may be set on condition that the ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the gaming area.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the special figure special variation is set to be set for a predetermined period (eight times), but the predetermined period is not set by the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, but the next jackpot is set. A special figure special variation may be set until it is executed. Thereby, it is possible to make it easy to provide a big hit game to the player by executing the special figure special variation.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 97 to 101. First, the timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 as in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. For example, every 2 milliseconds. It is a periodic process executed at

  Of the timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment, the processes of S101, S106, S108, and S109 are S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. , And the same process as each process of S109 is executed.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the variation of the special symbol selected in the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special symbol lottery result is the specific lottery result (small hit D). It is configured to be able to shift to a specific gaming state in which a variation pattern (variation time) different from the pattern (variation time) is selected, and in that specific gaming state, one operation cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d ), A special symbol variation pattern is set so that a lottery of a special symbol whose lottery result is a small hit is executed a plurality of times.

  As a result, a plurality of small hit games can be executed in one operation cycle of the V gate 650d, so that a plurality of small hits are won within a predetermined period (the operation cycle of the V gate 650d). In addition, the opening timing of the door 650f in the small hit game can be made different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily give a gaming state (privilege) that is advantageous to the player by frequent occurrence of small hits within a predetermined period.

  In addition, in this 2nd Embodiment, although the structure which changes the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol selected based on the lottery result of a special symbol was used, if it is the structure which has the same effect, Other configurations may be used. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d may be set to be longer than the normal operation cycle. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games within a predetermined period (the operation period of the V gate 650d) without using a configuration for changing the variation pattern of the selected special symbol. be able to.

  Furthermore, when the operating period of the V gate 650d is lengthened, it is preferable to extend the period during which the V gate 650d is in the inductive state (open state). As a result, the proportion of the guidance state (open state) in one operation cycle of the V gate 650d can be increased, and when multiple small hit games are executed within one operation cycle, V There is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility of passing a small hit.

  Similarly, the game time of the small hit game may be shortened so that a plurality of small hit games can be executed within a predetermined period (the operation cycle of the V gate 650d). In this case, in the small hit game, the small hit game may be set so that a period during which the specific door 650f is closed, that is, a small hit opening period or a small hit ending period is shortened. By doing in this way, the time of the whole small hit game is shortened, but the time of the period during which the specific door 650f is opened (the period during which a ball can be won in the second specific winning port 650a) is not changed. That is, it is possible to increase the proportion of the time that the ball can win in the second specific winning slot 650a in the time of the entire small hit game, and multiple small hit games are executed within one operation cycle. In this case, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a small hit game that can pass V is executed.

  Furthermore, the second embodiment has two gaming states (a normal gaming state and a short-time gaming state) in which the ratio of the special symbol lottery result to a specific lottery result (small hit D) is different, and the normal game When the special symbol lottery result satisfies the predetermined condition in the state (by running a jackpot with a short time), it is configured to shift to the short-time gaming state with a higher probability of a specific lottery result than the normal gaming state Has been.

  By configuring in this way, the player can play the game with two games, that is, a game for drawing a special symbol and a game for passing a ball to a specific area. There is an effect that the situation of getting bored can be suppressed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the normal gaming state, two entrances (the first entrance 64a and the second entrance are different) in which the special symbol lottery result becomes a specific lottery result (small hit D). Since the ball entrance A64b) has a configuration (first entrance device 64) for alternately entering balls, whether the next winning winning “Small Bonus A” is Special Figure 1 in the normal gaming state. Since the degree of expectation that “small hit A” is continuously won varies depending on whether it is special figure 2, it is possible to provide the player with a new gameability of continuously winning “small hit A”. This has the effect of making it possible to improve interest.

  Also in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the sound lamp control device 114 executes the same control as in the first embodiment described above, but the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (small hit D Thus, while the special variation pattern is being executed as the special symbol variation pattern, the special variation D (variation time 1 second) is set as the special variation pattern regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, in the first embodiment described above, the continuous effect is executed when the small hits are continuous, but in the second embodiment, the continuous effect is always performed during the period in which the special variation pattern is set. It may be configured to execute.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, winning information (entry information) based on entering the first special symbol and winning information (entry information) based on entering the second special symbol are included. In this case, the order is changed in the order in which the balls are entered (the order in which they are stored on hold) (so-called in-order ingestion). On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the winning information (entry information) based on the entry to the second special symbol is prioritized over the winning information (entry information) based on the entry to the first special symbol. The point of difference is that a configuration (so-called special figure 2 priority digestion) is used.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that it is stored in the ROM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is changed. The contents of the various tables are changed, and the contents of the RAM of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. About another structure, it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 102, the board surface structure of the game board 13 in this 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102, the gaming board 13 of the third embodiment is different in that the first entrance 1064 is changed to the first entrance device 64. About another structure, it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  The first entrance 1064 is an entrance for acquiring entrance information of the first special symbol when a ball enters.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. FIG. 103 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. In the ROM 202 of the third embodiment, the values of the first random number table 202a and the first small hit type selection table 202c are changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the RAM 203 of the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment in that it includes a change execution flag 203j, a change order storage area 203k, and a special figure 2B valid period flag 203r. And the valid period measurement counter 203s are deleted.

  Next, the first random number table 3202a according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 3202a. The first hit random number table 3202a differs from the first hit random number table 202a of the first embodiment described above in the value of the small hit determination value. Although the same small hit determination value is defined in FIG. 2, each of the first random number table 3202a has a different determination value.

  First, the small hit determination value for special figure 1 is “1”. Therefore, as a result of the lottery of the special symbol based on the special figure 1, the probability of winning a small hit is set to “1/400”. Next, the small hit determination value for the special figure 2 is “1 to 398”. Therefore, as a result of the special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2, the probability of winning a small hit is set to “398/400”.

  By configuring in this way, it is difficult to win a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, it can be easy to win a small hit in the lottery of the special figure 2, the gaming state that fluctuates the special figure 2, the special figure It is possible to make the gaming state more advantageous to the player than the gaming state in which 1 is changed.

  Next, the first small hit type selection table 202c in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c in the third embodiment, and FIG. 105 (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 3202c1. FIG. 105 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 type selection table 3202c2.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 (a) and 105 (b), in the third embodiment, the ratio of the small hit A that is advantageous to the player to the first embodiment described above is selected, It is lowered in the special figure 1 type selection table 3202c1.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, in the lottery based on the fluctuation of the special figure 1, both the probability of winning a small hit and the selection ratio of the small hit A when winning the small hit are both special figures. Since it is lower than the lottery based on the fluctuation of 2, the gaming state that changes the special figure 2 is configured to be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state that changes the special figure 1.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, control processing of the main control device in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 106) and the start winning process (see FIG. 35). 39) is changed to the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 107). Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. In the special symbol variation process 3 in the third embodiment, processes from S271 to S274 are added to the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment. About other processing, since the same processing as the 1st control example is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  In the process of S202, when it is determined that the current state is not changing (S202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S271). And it is discriminate | determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S272).

  In the process of S272, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S272: Yes), the process proceeds to S211. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not larger than 0 (S272: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is then set. Obtain (S273).

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S274). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S274: Yes), the process proceeds to S207. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 0 (S274: No), this process is terminated.

  In the special symbol variation process 3 described above, when the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) ), The variation based on the special symbol 2 is executed (so-called special symbol 2 priority).

  Next, the start winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The start winning process 2 in the third embodiment is different from the start winning process in the first embodiment in the process related to the change order storage area 203k and the start winning process related to the second special symbol. About other processing, since the same processing as the 1st control example is performed, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, the processes of S651 to S657 are executed. These processes are the same as S601 in the start winning process (see FIG. 39) and S701 to S706 in the special figure 1 start winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above. Omitted.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance (S658). In the third embodiment, there is one entrance (second entrance) for acquiring the winning information (entrance information) of the second special symbol by entering the ball. Different from the embodiment. In the process of S658, if it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance (start winning prize) (S658: Yes), then the processes of S659 to S663 are executed. In addition, since the process of S659-S663 performed in this 3rd Embodiment is the same process as the process of S805-S809 of the special figure 2 start winning process (refer FIG. 41) in 1st Embodiment mentioned above. Detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing the process of S663, the same prefetch process as the prefetch process (S604) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment described above is executed (S664). finish.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, since the winning information of the second special symbol (Special Figure 2) is preferentially changed, the fluctuation based on the winning information of Special Figure 2 is continuously performed. Can be executed. In the lottery based on the special figure 2, since the ratio of winning a small hit A is set higher than the lottery based on the special figure 1, a gaming state in which it is difficult to enter the second special symbol (normal gaming state) And a gaming state (so-called short-time gaming state) that makes it easy to enter the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to set a gaming state in which it is difficult to win the small hit A and a gaming state in which it is easy to win the small hit A.

  In addition, in the case of using a configuration in which the second special symbol fluctuates preferentially as in the third embodiment, in order to execute the continuous effect of the first embodiment described above, the holding ball of the second special symbol It is only necessary to configure so as to execute the process related to the continuous performance only for the target. That is, in the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed in the order in which the balls are entered (so-called winning order digestion), and the prize received from the main controller 110 is received. Since special symbol changes are executed in the order of command processing, in the winning command receiving process, all the winning commands (the winning command based on the special symbol 1 or the winning command based on the special symbol 2) are processed for the continuous production. (See FIG. 59).

  However, in the third embodiment, since the second special symbol is preferentially changed, the special symbol changes in an order different from the processing order of the winning command received from the main controller 110. There is a possibility that. Therefore, in the case of adopting a configuration that preferentially executes fluctuations based on one special symbol among a plurality of special symbols as in the third embodiment, it corresponds to the special symbol on the side to be preferentially executed. It is only necessary to execute the process related to the continuous performance only for the winning command to be performed. By comprising in this way, the same continuous effect as 1st Embodiment mentioned above can be performed.

  Further, in the third embodiment, a normal gaming state (see FIG. 104) in which the first special symbol (special drawing 1) lottery is mainly executed and it is difficult to win a small hit, and the second special symbol (special drawing 2). ) Lottery is performed mainly in the short-time game state (see FIG. 104) that is easy to win in the small win, and further, the specific area (second variable prize win) The pass detection switch 650e5) provided in the device 650 is configured to be able to provide a small hit game in which a ball easily passes.

  Thereby, in the normal gaming state, it is suppressed that the small hit game is frequently executed, and in the short time gaming state in which the small hit game is frequently executed, the small hit game is executed a plurality of times. It becomes possible to provide a gaming state advantageous to the player. Therefore, when a player wins a small hit game multiple times, it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when winning a small hit game alone. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to the situation. The configuration of the special figure special variation used in the second embodiment described above may be used in the third embodiment.

<Regarding Modification 1 of the Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the modification 1 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. In this modification 1, the board surface structure of the game board 13 is changed with respect to 3rd Embodiment mentioned above. In the first modification, the second ball entry device 1640 is arranged below the first ball entry port 1064, and the second variable prize-winning device 650 is arranged below the second ball entry device 640. It differs from the board surface configuration of the gaming board 13 of the third embodiment in that through gates 67 are arranged on the left and right sides of the board 13, respectively. About another structure, it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  In addition, the 2nd entrance 1640b (not shown) accompanied by the electric accessory 1640a (not shown) is provided in the 2nd entrance 1640 used in this modification 1. FIG. The electric combination 1640a is different from the electric combination 640a described above in that it has two movable pieces (a right movable piece and a left movable piece) that are driven when the opening operation is performed. Since it is the same as the 2nd ball entrance device 640 used in the 1st embodiment mentioned above, the explanation is omitted.

  According to the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the first modification, it is possible to pass a ball through the through gate 67 even when a game aimed at the left region of the game board 13 (normal game) is being performed, and Even when a normal game is being executed, it is configured such that a ball can be entered into the second entry device 640.

  With this configuration, for example, a ball is passed through the through gate 67 in a normal gaming state, and a normal symbol lottery is executed. If the winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second pitching device 640 is released, and the ball is pitched into the second pitching port 1640b of the second pitching device 1640 (start winning prize). ).

  And in this modification 1, since it is the structure which changes a 2nd special symbol preferentially similarly to 3rd Embodiment mentioned above, the game state by which the fluctuation | variation of a 2nd special symbol is continuously performed in a normal gaming state Can be provided. Furthermore, since the ratio of winning a small hit A is set higher for the lottery of the second special symbol than the lottery of the first special symbol, if the variation of the second special symbol is continuously executed, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively winning A.

  As a result, even if the game state is a normal game state, a game that increases the possibility of winning a small hit A continuously for a player by winning a normal symbol lottery. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the board surface configuration of the game board 13 used in the first modification, the second variable winning device 650 that is in an open state in which a ball can be won when winning a small hit is disposed at the lower center of the game board 13, By playing a game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 (normal game), the ball can reach the second variable winning device 650.

  This eliminates the need for the player to play a right-handed game even if the player wins a small hit. Further, when the small hit game is executed, it is not necessary to notify the player of the right-handed game with the third symbol display device 81 or the like. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that he / she has won a small hit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to winning multiple wins.

  In addition, you may apply the board surface structure of the game board 13 used for this modification 1 to 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and it changes into the various control performed in 3rd Embodiment. Various controls executed in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above may be applied.

<Regarding Modification 2 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the modification 2 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 109 is a front view showing the game board 13 in the second modification. In the second modification, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is changed from the third embodiment described above. In the second modification, a winning unit 710 (see FIG. 110) having the third variable winning device 700 is disposed in the right region of the game board 13, and a first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the winning unit 710. However, it differs from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the third embodiment in that the second pitching device 640 is disposed on the downstream side. About another structure, it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment. Hereafter, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the structure same as the pachinko machine 10 of 3rd Embodiment, and the illustration and description are abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the outline of the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 110. FIG. 110 is a front view schematically showing the internal structure of the winning unit 710. FIG. 110 schematically shows only the main structure with the cover member removed in order to explain the internal structure of the winning unit 710.

  First, as shown in FIG. 109, most of the game balls that have entered the right area of the game board 13 pass through the opening 710 a of the winning unit 710. As shown in FIG. 110, the winning unit 710 has a first flow path 711a having a first outlet 711 for discharging a ball that has passed through the opening 710a onto the game board 13, and a ball that has passed through the opening 710a. A second flow path 712a having a second discharge port 712 for discharging on the board 13, and a third variable winning device 700 configured such that a ball flowing down the second flow path 712a can win. Based on the operation of the opening / closing member 700b (see FIG. 110) of the third variable winning device 700, the spheres that have passed through the opening 710a flow down the respective paths.

  The third variable prize-winning device 700 is configured such that a ball can be entered when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, and when the small hit game is executed, the opening / closing member 700b is operated. 3 The first opening portion 700a1 and the second opening portion 700a2 of the variable winning device 700 are each changed to a state where a ball can be won. The ball that has won the third variable winning device 700 is configured to pass through a specific area (passage detection switch 700c2) provided in the third variable winning device 700 or the normal discharge path 703.

  Further, the second modification is different from the third embodiment described above in that a variation time of 1 second is set as a variation pattern of the special symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (not shown). )

  Next, the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIG. The opening 710a of the winning unit 710 is an opening having an opening width corresponding to one sphere, and is formed at a position through which most of the spheres launched to the right area of the game board 13 pass. A second opening / closing member 700b3 is provided at a position below the opening 710a (a position where a sphere that has passed through the opening 710a arrives). The second opening / closing member 700b3 switches between a state where the sphere can pass through the first flow path 711a (open state) or a state where the sphere cannot pass (closed state) and a state of the path of the first flow path 711a. It is configured to be variable.

  The second opening / closing member 700b3 is configured to follow the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 700b described later, and the second opening / closing member 700b4 transmits the operation of the opening / closing member 700b opened / closed by the opening / closing solenoid 700g. 700b3 is configured to be movable back and forth. The second opening / closing member 700b3 is configured by a shutter mechanism that can be moved in and out from the game board side. In the closed state, the first flow path 711a is completely covered by the second opening / closing member 700b3. The upper surface of the second opening / closing member 700b3 has an inclined surface on which the sphere flows down to the second flow down path 712a side (left side as viewed from the front in FIG. 110) in the closed state.

  Here, a mechanism for opening and closing the second opening and closing member 700b3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the winning unit 710 in a state where the second opening / closing member 700b3 is closed (a state where the small hit game is not executed). FIG. 111 (b) It is the top view which showed typically the winning unit 710 in the state (state at the time of small hit game execution) in which the 2nd opening-and-closing member 700b3 is open | released.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the opening / closing member 700b of the third variable winning device 700 is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by an opening / closing member solenoid 700g, and the opening / closing member solenoid 700g is turned off. In the state, when the opening / closing member 700b is located in a state protruding in the forward direction of the game board 13 (the state shown in FIG. 111 (a)) and the opening / closing member drive solenoid 700g is set to ON, the opening / closing member 700b is turned on the game board. It is comprised so that it may be located in the state (state shown to FIG. 111 (b)) of 13 backward.

  Among the opening / closing member 700b, a plurality of protrusions are provided on one end side (side facing the second opening / closing member) of the first opening / closing member 700b2. And the transmission member 700b4 which has the engaging part which the some protrusion can engage is provided. The transmission member 700b4 is rotatably supported with respect to the winning unit 710. The second opening / closing member 700b3 has a plurality of protrusions on one end side (side facing the opening / closing member), and is provided at a position where the protrusions engage with the transmission member 700b4 described above.

  Here, the action of the second opening / closing member 700b3 changing in accordance with the operation of the opening / closing member 700b will be described with reference to FIG. For example, when the opening / closing member 700b is changed from the protruded state (the state shown in FIG. 111 (a)) to the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 111 (b)), transmission is performed along with the movement of the opening / closing member 700b. The member 700b4 rotates (rotates right as viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 111). When the transmission member 700b4 rotates, the second opening / closing member 700b3 engaged with the transmission member 700b4 moves in a direction protruding to the front side of the game board 13. That is, when the opening / closing member 700b and the second opening / closing member 700b3 are driven at the opposite positions, that is, when the opening / closing member 700b protrudes, the second opening / closing member 700b3 is retracted. The transmission member 700b4 is mechanically configured so that the second opening / closing member 700b3 protrudes when the opening / closing member 700b is retracted.

  Returning to FIG. 110, the description will be continued. In the second flow path 712a through which the sphere flowing down the upper surface of the second opening / closing member 700b3 is guided, an inlet portion and an outlet portion of the flow path are configured by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 700b, and a detour 710b is interposed therebetween. It is configured.

  The detour 710b is a passage provided for extending the flow time of the sphere flowing down the second flow path 712a (decreasing the flow speed), and the time for the sphere to pass through the second flow path 712a is 2 Designed to be seconds. In this time, in the case of winning consecutive hits, the ball that has passed through the second flow path 712a during the previously executed small hit enters the second opening 700a2 during the subsequent small hit. This is the time when a ball is possible.

  That is, in the second modification, since the variation time of the special symbol for which the lottery result is a small hit is 1 second, the second downflow path is executed during the small hit previously executed when winning the consecutive small hits. A sphere that has passed through 712a (entered the second downflow path 712a during the ending period at the small hit (see FIG. 15B)), the variation time (1 second) of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit and the small hit After the opening period (0.1 second), it is possible to enter the second opening 700a2.

  Note that the special symbol change time corresponding to the small hit and the ball passing time of the second flow down path 712a are not limited to the time set in this modification, The ball that has entered the second flow path 712a during the previous small hit (the ball that has reached the third variable winning device 700 at the timing when the opening and closing member 700b is closed during the small hit (during the small hit ending)) It is only necessary to set a time in which the third variable prize-winning device 700 can win a prize at a later small hit. For example, if the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is set to 4 seconds and the opening period during the small hit is set to 1 second, the ball passing time of the second downstream path 712a is set to 5.5. What is necessary is just to set to 2 seconds (time which added the fluctuation time 4 second, the opening period 1 second, and a part of ending time (0.5 second) in the previous small hit).

  Here, the second flow down path 712a will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (a). As described above, the inlet portion and the outlet portion of the second flow down path 712a are formed by the opening and closing member 700b, and when the opening and closing member 700b is located at the protruding position as shown in FIG. It is configured as a flowable path. In this state, the sphere that has flowed down the upper surface of the first opening / closing part 700b1 of the opening / closing member 700b flows down to the bypass 710b.

  The bypass 710b is configured as a path through which the sphere flows in a meandering manner by the first side wall 710b1, the second side wall 710b2, the third side wall 710b3, and the bottom surface member. Hereinafter, a specific configuration of the detour 710b will be described. In addition, the phrase which shows the direction used in specific description shows a direction when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front in principle. The sphere that has entered the second flow path 712a first collides with the right side surface of the first side wall 710b1 (right side as viewed in FIG. 111). The bottom surface portion on which the right side surface of the first side wall 710b1 is disposed is inclined in the back direction of the game board 13 (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 111), and the ball that collides with the right side surface of the first side wall 710b1 is It flows down in the depth direction of the game board 13 and collides with the right end side of the second side wall 710b2. The bottom surface portion on which the right end side of the second side wall 710b2 is disposed is inclined leftward of the game board 13 (leftward from the viewpoint of FIG. 111), and the ball that has collided with the right end side of the second side wall 710b2 The flow path on the back side flows down toward the left side of the game board 13. As described above, the bypass 710b used in the present embodiment is configured such that the flow direction of the sphere is changed to a substantially right angle by the inclination of the bottom surface portion and each side wall, and thus the flow of the sphere (rolling). A long distance can be set.

  Note that the detour 710b may be configured using a configuration other than the configuration of the detour 710b described above. For example, the bottom surface of the detour 710b is inclined downward in the left direction (leftward from the viewpoint of FIG. 111). You may comprise by one member and you may comprise each side wall so that it may become an obtuse angle with respect to the flow direction of a sphere. With this configuration, the flow of the sphere (rolling distance) cannot be set as long as the configuration of the bypass 710b used in this embodiment, but the configuration of the bypass 710b can be simplified. It becomes possible.

  What is necessary is just to select suitably about the structure of the detour 710b mentioned above according to the space which arrange | positions the detour 710b, and the flowing-down (rolling) distance of the required ball | bowl.

  The sphere that has flowed down the detour 710b flows down the upper surface of the second opening / closing member 700b3 of the opening / closing member 700b that constitutes the outlet of the second flowing-down path 712a, passes through the second discharge port 712 (see FIG. 110), and is played. It is discharged to the board 13.

  Returning to FIG. 110, the description will be continued. The first opening / closing part 700b1 that forms the inlet part of the second flow-down path 712a is designed to have a shorter opening width (distance that the sphere flows down) than the second opening / closing part 700b2 that forms the outlet part. The first opening / closing part 700b1 is designed to have an opening width of 15 millimeters, and the second opening / closing part 700b2 is designed to have an opening width of 45 millimeters.

  With this configuration, the number of balls rolling on the upper surface of the second opening / closing part 700b2 of the opening / closing member 700b is made larger than the number of balls rolling on the upper surface of the first opening / closing part 700b1 of the opening / closing member 700b. be able to. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 700b is opened at a high speed (for example, 0.2 seconds), the second opening 700a2 covered by the second opening / closing portion 700b2 is more than the first opening 700a1 covered by the first opening / closing portion 700b1. The opening is easier to win the ball.

  Next, the structure of the third variable winning device 700 provided in the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the third variable winning device 700 has two openings (first opening 700a1 and second opening 700a2), and the game board 13 is operated by an opening / closing member drive solenoid 700g (see FIG. 111). The opening / closing member 700b variable in the front-rear direction is configured to be variable between an open state in which a sphere can pass through the two openings and a closed state in which the sphere cannot pass (difficult).

  The first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2 use a configuration that can be changed between an open state and a closed state by one opening / closing member 700b, and the two openings can be changed between an open state and a closed state at the same timing. Is done. In the opening / closing member 700b, portions (first opening / closing portion 700b1 and second opening / closing portion 700b2) covering the respective openings are configured to have different lengths in the front-rear direction of the game board 13, and the opening / closing member 700b You may vary the timing which each opening part changes to an open state and a closed state by operation | movement.

  For example, the first opening / closing part 700b1 of the opening / closing member 700b covering the first opening 700a1 is longer than the second opening / closing part 700b2 of the opening / closing member 700b covering the second opening 700a2 (so as to protrude in the front-rear direction of the game board 13). And) delaying the timing at which the first opening 700a1 is changed from the closed state to the open state (the state where the opening is not covered by the opening / closing member) rather than the second opening 700a2, and is closed from the open state. You may make it advance the timing which changes to a state.

  By configuring in this way, the period during which the first opening 700a1 is in the open state with respect to the second opening 700a2 is shortened, so that the easiness to win each opening can be further varied. There is.

  Returning to FIG. 110, the description will be continued. The sphere won from the first opening 700a1 of the third variable winning device 700 is detected by the detection switch 700f1, and flows down the first winning path 700d1 to reach the V gate 700c1. The first winning path 700d1 is configured such that the passing time of the sphere is about 1 second.

  Next, the ball that has won from the second opening 700a2 of the third variable winning device 700 is detected by the detection switch 700f2, and after flowing down the second winning path 700d2, reaches the V gate 700c1. . In order to reliably detect the winning ball from the second opening 700a2 by the detection switch 700f2, specifically, the ball passage width of the ball from the second opening 700a2 toward the detection switch 700f2 is narrowed. The opening width (about 45 millimeters) of the second opening 700a2 is configured to be the ball passage width (13 millimeters) of the detection switch 700f2. Further, the second winning path 700d2 is configured so that the passing time of the sphere is about 0.3 seconds.

  Further, the first winning path 700d1 and the second winning path 700d2 described above are configured to merge on the V gate 700c1 in the third variable winning apparatus 700.

  The V gate 700c1 is configured to be variable between a guidance state and a regulation state at a constant cycle after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, like the V gate 650d of the first embodiment described above. Since the detailed configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof is omitted.

  The sphere that has reached the V gate 700c1 passes through a specific area (detection switch 700c2) in the V discharge path 704 if the V gate 700c1 is in a guidance state (a state that can pass through a specific area of the V discharge path). It is collected at the collection port. If the V gate 700c1 is in a restricted state (impossible to pass through a specific region of the V discharge path (difficult)), it rolls on the V gate 700c1, passes through the normal discharge path 703, and is collected at the collection port. .

  In the third variable winning device 700 configured as described above, when the winning unit is continuously won, the first opening 700a1 and the second opening are used for the small hits to be executed later among the consecutive winning points. A ball can enter from both 700a2. Furthermore, since the time to reach the V gate 700c1 is different between the ball that has entered from the first opening 700a1 and the ball that has entered from the second opening 700a2, the ball that has entered from either one of the openings 700a1 has entered. It is possible to increase the possibility that the sphere passes through the V gate 700c1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player when winning continuously for a small hit than when winning for a small win alone. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to consecutive winning of winning.

  The configuration of the winning unit 710 has been described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. Next, the flow of balls in the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a ball flow according to the operating state (closed state or open state) of the opening / closing member (door) 700b of the third variable winning device 700 included in the winning unit 710.

  As shown in FIG. 112, when the opening / closing member (door) 700b of the third variable winning device 700 is closed (closed state), the second opening / closing member 700b3 has a first flow path (discharge path) 711a that is a ball. The ball enters the winning unit 710 and passes through the first flow path (discharge path) 711 a and is discharged to the game board 13.

  In addition, in a state where the opening / closing member (door) 700b of the third variable winning device 700 is closed (closed state), the sphere flowing down on the first opening / closing portion (front door) 700b1 flows down to the detour 710b. . Then, the ball that has passed through the detour 710 b flows down the upper surface of the second opening / closing part 700 b 2 and is discharged from the second discharge port 712 to the game board 13.

  Next, in a state where the opening / closing member (door) 700b of the third variable prize winning device 700 is open (open state), the second opening / closing member (guide plate) 700b3 has a first downflow path (discharge path) 711a that is a ball. The ball that has entered the winning unit 710 in a closed state where it cannot pass through flows down on the second opening / closing member (guide plate) 700b3 toward the first opening 700a1 of the third variable winning device 700.

  The ball that flows down to the first opening 700a1 wins the first opening 700a1 because the opening / closing member (door) 700b is in an open state. In addition, the sphere that has passed the detour 710b also wins the second opening 700a2.

  As described above, in the third variable winning device 700 used in the second modification, the ball that could not win from the first opening portion 700a1 flows down the detour 710b, and the first winning hit is made. Since the three variable winning device 700 is opened again, the ball that has flowed down the detour 710b can win from the second opening 700a2. With this configuration, when a small hit frequently occurs so that the third variable prize-winning device 700 is continuously opened, the ball flows down to both the first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2. Therefore, even if it is a small hit that opens at high speed, it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball will win the third variable winning device 700.

  Note that the difference between the ball passing time of the first winning path 700d1 (about 1 second) and the ball passing time of the second winning path 700d2 (about 0.3 seconds) is within the period during which the V gate 700c1 is in the guiding state. The difference is good. By configuring in this way, it is highly likely that a ball that has passed through either the first winning path 700d1 or the second winning path 700d2 will pass through the V gate 700c1 while the V gate 700c1 is in the guiding state. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming state more advantageous to the player.

  In addition, since the opening width of the second opening portion is longer than the opening width of the first opening portion, the second opening portion is more spherical than the first opening portion. It will be easy to win. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the third variable winning device 700 when the small hits are continuous.

  Further, in the normal gaming state where the third variable winning device 700 does not operate, the opening / closing member 700b is closed and the second opening / closing member 700b3 is open, so that the third variable prize-winning device 700 is fired toward the right region of the game board 13. The game balls flow down the first flow path 711a and are discharged from the first discharge port 711 to the lower right area side of the game board 13.

  Therefore, in a gaming state other than the small hit game, the ball launched by the player to the right area of the game board 13 is suppressed (prohibited) from flowing down the second flow path 712a of the winning unit 710. Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a game state other than the small hit game (for example, a big hit game state), a situation in which the ball flows down the second flow down path 712a and delays the flow down time is suppressed ( (Prohibited).

  In addition, even if a right-handed game is performed in advance before the small hit game is executed, the ball does not flow down the second flow down path 712a, so the second opening 700a2 is opened in the first small hit game. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game such as passing through from being executed.

  Furthermore, in the second modification, the second winning ball flows from the second opening 700a2 to the V gate 700c1 rather than the first winning path 700d1 where the winning ball flows from the first opening 700a1 to the V gate 700c1. The passing time of the winning path 700d2 is shortened. Therefore, the ball that has won the third variable prize-winning device 700 can be caused to flow down to the V gate 700c1 at different timings depending on the winning opening, and whether or not a big win is awarded to the player with a small hit game. You can entertain no.

  Note that, for example, the period in which the V gate 700c1 is in the open state is configured to be 0.5 seconds after the small hit game is executed, so that only the ball that has won a prize from the second opening 700a2 is in a specific region ( You may comprise so that it can pass the passage detection switch 700c2). By configuring in this way, small hits are continuously performed, and the sphere can pass through the V gate 700c1 by allowing the sphere to pass through the second opening 700a2.

  In order to reduce the size of the third variable prize winning device 700 used in the second modification, as shown in FIG. 110 or 111, the first opening / closing portion 700b1 of the opening / closing member 700b and the second opening / closing member The interval between the first opening and closing member 700b1 and the second opening and closing member 700b3 of the opening and closing member 700b is configured as an interval corresponding to several balls, for example. You may comprise so that a space | interval may be covered with the guide plate which a ball | bowl can roll from the 2nd opening-and-closing member 700b3 toward the opening-and-closing member 700b.

  By doing in this way, a plurality of balls rolling on the second opening / closing member in a state where the opening / closing member 700b is open (a state where the second opening / closing member is closed) during the small hitting game, It is possible to flow down on the opening / closing member 700b in a state where the opening / closing member 700b is closed (a state where the second opening / closing member is opened).

  In the second modification, two opening portions (first opening portion 700a1 and second opening portion 700a2) are provided as ball entry means for entering a ball into the third variable winning device 700. You may comprise a part in one. In this case, the second downflow path 712a is configured so that a ball that has not entered the opening at a small hit that is executed first among consecutive consecutive hits enters the opening at a small hit that is executed later. That's fine. In this case, staying means (stopper, magnet, etc.) for retaining the ball for a predetermined time (1 second in the second modification) until the second hitting flow is performed by the second downflow path 712a. It is good to make it the structure which has.

  As described above, in the second modification, in the case where the small hits are continuously executed, a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hits to be executed later are won alone is provided. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to consecutive winning of winning.

  In addition, when winning a consecutive small hit, the second downstream path 712a passes through the second downstream path 712a during the previously executed small hit (the ending period in the small hit (see FIG. 15B)). A detour (guidance means) is provided that allows a ball that has entered the ball to enter the second opening 700a2 during a small hit that is executed after a special symbol change time (one second) corresponding to the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where a small win that is executed later is more reliably won. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to consecutive winning of winning.

  Further, in the second modification, the small hitting can be executed a plurality of times at intervals shorter than the operation cycle of the V gate 700c1 as the guiding means. Thus, for example, if you win three consecutive small hits, by providing a gaming state where the ball is easy to enter in the subsequent small hits (second and third), When the V gate 700c1 is in the guiding state, it becomes possible to cause the ball to enter the third variable prize winning device, and a game that is more advantageous than the case where the small winning that is executed later is won by the small winning alone. It is possible to provide a state, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to winning consecutively.

  In the second modification, a configuration is used in which the operation of the V gate 700c1 is always controlled at a constant cycle. For example, the opening operation of the V gate 700c1 is performed after a small hit (third variable winning device). It may be configured to execute for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after 700 opening / closing members 700b are opened. By doing in this way, the ball that has flowed down the second flow down path 712a can be awarded to the third variable winning device 700 immediately after the subsequent small hit in the case of winning the small hit continuously. It becomes possible. Therefore, in the case where the small hits are continuously executed, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hits to be executed later are won alone. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation due to consecutive winning of winning.

  As described above, in the second modification described above, the second flow path 712a uses the meandering detour 710b as the flow period extending means for extending the flow period of the sphere, thereby extending the second flow distance of the sphere. Although it has been configured to extend the flow period of the flow path 712a, as another structure for extending the flow distance of the sphere, a Kleung structure that flows down while circulating the sphere may be used.

  In addition, as a method for extending the sphere flow period, a configuration for reducing the sphere flow velocity may be used as a method other than the method for extending the sphere flow distance. As such a configuration, for example, as a member capable of reducing the flow velocity of the sphere due to friction generated between objects, at least a part of the second flow channel 712a is made of a material having a high friction coefficient (urethane rubber or the like). A configuration may be used in which the flow velocity of the sphere is reduced by forming the sphere, and the ball rolling surface of the second flow channel 712a is roughly formed, or a protrusion is provided between the objects (the first The frictional force between the two flow paths 712a and the sphere may be increased, and the flow speed of the sphere may be reduced.

  Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect can be obtained. In order to extend the flow period during which the sphere flows down the second flow path 712a, both the above-described flow distance extension means for extending the flow distance and the flow speed reduction means for reducing the flow speed of the sphere may be used. Good.

  In addition, you may apply the board surface structure of the game board 13 used for this modification 1 to 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and it changes into the various control performed in 3rd Embodiment. Various controls executed in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above may be applied.

  In addition, although output processing based on various determination processes is performed in the main control device 110 in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, all the output information is the audio lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal plate 261. Even when the determination process is performed by a device other than the main control device 110, all the information based on the determination result is output to the audio lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal plate 261. It is configured to be possible. In addition, the output information can be notified to the outside in an identifiable manner, and as means for performing the notification, various devices (LCD, speakers, etc.) connected to the sound lamp control device 113 or directly to the main control device 110 are used. There are connected display units.

  In addition, you may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a probable machine) that shifts to a high-probability gaming state in which a big-hit probability is higher than usual once a big-hit probability. In this case, a method of continuing the high-probability gaming state that shifts after the jackpot until the next jackpot, a method of continuing until the number of times the special symbol fluctuates reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), or whenever the special symbol fluctuates A lottery for shifting from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed, and when the lottery is won, a method for shifting to the normal gaming state is conceivable, but any pachinko machine may be implemented. In addition, when changing to the high probability gaming state, in addition to the high probability of jackpot, the variation time of special symbols is shortened, the probability of hitting normal symbols is high, the variation time of normal symbols It may be implemented in a pachinko machine that is shortened or changes the variable pattern of the variable pitching means that is variable when a normal symbol lottery is won. Also, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (such as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Also, it has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and a pachinko machine that is in a special gaming state under the condition that a ball is won in the special area, and two special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2). ) At the same time, and based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols, the lottery of the other special symbol may be invalidated or interrupted. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  You may comprise combining each or all of said each embodiment and a modification, respectively. In addition, although the sub control devices such as the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are configured, the present invention is not limited thereto, and all functions may be integrated into the main control device 110.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Advantageous for multiple hits)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discriminating condition, display means for displaying identification information based on a discrimination result by the discriminating means, and displaying the identification information dynamically on the display means for a predetermined period, and then the discriminating means A privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the determination result by A bonus game executing means for executing a game, a specific area in which a ball can pass when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, and the ball has passed through the specific area In the case where the bonus game is executed a plurality of times in a state where a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in a gaming machine having a bonus granting means that grants a bonus advantageous to the player , Wherein at least one of the benefits game among a plurality of times the award game to be executed, the gaming machine characterized by having a setting means for setting so that the specific area is a sphere is executed passable A1.

  Here, the gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened by a bonus game (such as a small hitting game) and a specific area that is provided in the variable winning device and that a jackpot game is executed by passing a ball And a guide member that guides the sphere to the specific area, a mode in which the sphere easily passes through the specific area and a mode in which the sphere hardly passes through the specific area, and a means that repeatedly controls the sphere in a specific cycle. Pachinko machines that randomize the occurrence of jackpot games in a specific jackpot game by making the opening operation of the variable winning device based on the jackpot game independent of the control operation of the guiding member have been proposed (for example, special (Open 2011-206309). In this case, the timing at which the variable winning device is released by the small hit game and the timing at which the mode of the guide member changes are independent and have no relationship, so at what timing the ball has entered the variable winning device. However, if the winning game is won multiple times, there is no advantage for the player, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player's willingness to play is increased. There was a problem of being lowered. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in player's willingness to play.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a state where a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, at least one of the award games among the privilege games executed by the setting means a plurality of times. Is set so that the sphere can pass through the specific area. Thereby, a state advantageous to a player can be provided by winning a privilege game a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the bonus game is won multiple times.

  The gaming machine A1 has variable entry means for changing from a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter to an open state in which the ball can enter based on the execution of the privilege game, and the variable entry A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the specific area is provided in the means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the specific area is provided inside the variable pitch that changes to the open state based on the execution of the privilege game. Thereby, it is possible to execute a game aiming at a specific area only when a privilege game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game value for the special game to the player, and when the special game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  In the gaming machine A2, a variable means that is provided in the variable ball entry means and can be varied between an advantageous state in which a ball can easily pass through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball cannot easily pass through the specific area, and its variable Variable control means for changing the means alternately between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the variable means is changed to the advantageous state by the variable control means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable control means is variably controlled by the variable control means in an advantageous state in which the sphere can easily pass through the specific area and in an unfavorable state in which it is difficult to pass, and the sphere can pass through the specific area when the variable means becomes in the advantageous state A predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the ball that has entered the variable entry means after the bonus game is executed can pass through the specific area, thereby increasing the difficulty of the ball passing through the specific area. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine A3, the variable control means variably controls the variable means so that the variable means is repeatedly changed between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the variable means is repeatedly varied between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle by the variable control means, the timing at which the variable means becomes advantageous is made random with respect to the timing at which the bonus game is executed. Is possible. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player can be motivated to play the game because there is a possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area no matter what timing the ball enters the variable ball entry means.

  The gaming machine A5 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, wherein the specific condition is established when a plurality of the bonus games are executed in a predetermined order.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, since a specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of privilege games are executed in a predetermined order, a new gameability is provided in which a state advantageous to the player is provided based on a plurality of determination results by the determination means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The case where a plurality of privilege games are executed in a predetermined order is the result of determination by the determining means while the privilege game is executed in addition to the order in which a plurality of privilege games are continuously executed. Combinations that deviate may be set in a predetermined order. By doing in this way, even if the result of discrimination by the discriminating means is off, there is a possibility that a state advantageous to the player may be provided, so that the player can always be expected. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine A5, the predetermined order is one in which the bonus games are executed continuously.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the specific condition is satisfied by continuously executing the bonus game, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area when the bonus game is won, the bonus game is won again next time. For example, the sphere can easily pass through the specific area. When the bonus game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information based on the ball entering the ball entry means, Storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied, further including a second specification condition as the specification condition, and the second specification The game machine A7 is characterized in that the condition is established when a predetermined number or more of the entry information is stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of pieces of entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition unit based on the entrance of the ball into the entrance unit are stored in the storage unit until a determination condition is satisfied. A second specific condition is established by storing a predetermined number or more of the entry information in the storage means. This makes it possible to prompt the player to store a plurality of pieces of entry information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the variable control means sets the variable period as a single operation period, which is a third period that is a combination of the first period that is in the advantageous state and the second period that is in the disadvantageous state. Means for variably controlling, the setting means includes a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to the bonus game, the dynamic display period setting means, When the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the first privilege game and the other one of the privilege games are executed at different timings with respect to the one operation period. A gaming machine A8 comprising special dynamic display period setting means for setting a special dynamic display period as a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a game.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the following effects are produced. In other words, the variable control means variably controls the variable means by setting the third period, which is a combination of the first period in the advantageous state and the second period in the disadvantaged state, as one operation period. And the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to a privilege game is set by the dynamic display period setting means. Furthermore, when a special game is executed a plurality of times by the special dynamic display period setting means, one special game and one of the other special games are different at different timings for one operation period. A special dynamic display period is set to be executed. By doing in this way, the privilege game which can pass a specific area | region and the privilege game which cannot pass a specific area | region can be set with the dynamic display period performed. Therefore, by performing operation control of the variable means and the variable pitching means, it is possible to reduce the burden of processing related to the game compared to the case of setting a privilege game that can pass through the specific area and a bonus game that is difficult to pass through the specific area. There is an effect that can be.

  Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine A6, the first award game (the first award game (corresponding to any other award game)) among the award games continuously executed is included. On the other hand, the special dynamic display period is set so that the execution timing of the privilege game to be executed next (second privilege game (corresponding to one privilege game)) is different. In other words, by setting the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the second bonus game to the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of the bonus game that is continuously executed is set to one operation period of the variable means. Can be different. As a result, the target for setting the special dynamic display period is only the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the bonus game, so that the program capacity for executing the game process can be reduced.

  Note that in a configuration that does not include the gaming machine A6, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display corresponding to the detachment) that is executed while the plurality of privilege games is executed is also the special dynamic display period. Is configured to be set. Thereby, although the dynamic display used as the object which sets a special dynamic display period increases from the structure provided with game machine A6, when a privilege game is performed in multiple times, a state advantageous to a player is provided. There is an effect that the pattern can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A8, the special dynamic display period setting means, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of the first privilege game relative to the execution timing of any one of the other privilege games. The special dynamic display period is set so as to be different by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the following effects are produced. That is, if the special dynamic display period is set, the execution timing of one bonus game is different from the execution timing of any other bonus game by a predetermined period of time equal to or less than the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It becomes possible to make it. Thereby, when the execution timing of one privilege game and any other privilege game is made different, the execution timing of each privilege game is set across the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. Can be prevented. Therefore, since it becomes easy to provide a state advantageous to the player by winning the privilege game a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the privilege game is won a plurality of times. effective.

  Furthermore, it is desirable that the predetermined period equal to or less than the first period is different from the first period. By doing so, it is possible to execute a plurality of privileged games at a wide range of timings without crossing the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state, thereby providing a gaming state advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the probability of being played. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the bonus game is won multiple times.

  In addition, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of any one of the above-mentioned privilege games is set to be at least a predetermined period equal to or more than the first period with respect to the execution timing of any one of the other privilege games. The special dynamic display period may be set so as to be different. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to vary greatly the execution timing of the privilege game performed several times.

  In the gaming machine A9, the special dynamic display period setting means is configured to be able to set the special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times, and when the special dynamic display period is set to the predetermined number of times, The predetermined number of times is set such that, among the execution timings of the privilege game that is executed a plurality of times, the interval of execution timing of the privilege game that is farthest from the one operation period is wider than the second period. A gaming machine A10, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A9, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is possible to set a special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times for each of the award games that are executed a plurality of times, and among the execution timings of the award games that are executed a plurality of times, the most distant interval is variable. The predetermined number of times for which the special dynamic display period is set is set so as to be wider than the second period in which the means is disadvantageous. Thereby, when the special dynamic display period is set a predetermined number of times, the special game can be executed at a timing other than the second period in any special game in which the special dynamic display period is set. That is, it is possible to reliably provide an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the bonus game is won multiple times.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, when the determination result by the determination unit is the specific determination result, at least before the bonus game corresponding to the specific determination result is executed. An advantageous bonus game discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the bonus game is an advantageous bonus game in which a ball can pass through the specific area; and an information notifying means for notifying discrimination information reflecting the discrimination result of the advantageous bonus game discriminating means; A gaming machine A11 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are produced. That is, before the bonus game is executed, it is possible to notify the discrimination information that reflects the discrimination result as to whether or not the bonus game executed this time is a bonus game advantageous to the player. Therefore, even if the bonus game is won multiple times, the content of the information to be notified can be made different, so that if the bonus game is won multiple times, the player's willingness to play will be reduced. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In addition, as an information alerting | reporting means which alert | reports the information reflecting the discrimination | determination result of an advantageous privilege game discrimination | determination means, what is necessary is just the alerting | reporting aspect which a player can recognize, for example in a liquid crystal display device (3rd symbol display apparatus 81). Prior discrimination information reflecting the discrimination result of the advantageous privilege game discrimination means may be notified as an effect, or may be notified using sound output from a speaker. Moreover, you may alert | report using the light emission means (LED etc.) provided in a gaming machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines A7 to A11, pre-discriminating means for discriminating the entrance information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, and the prior discriminating information discriminated by the prior discriminating means are If it is determined that the information indicates a special game, whether the special game is an advantageous special game where a ball can pass through a specific area or whether the special game is a disadvantage special game where a ball is difficult to pass through the specific area. A second pre-discriminating unit that discriminates in advance, and the second prior discriminating unit that has been discriminated by the second pre-discriminating unit until the entrance information discriminated in advance by the second pre-discriminating unit is discriminated by the discriminating unit; A gaming machine A12 having a second prior discrimination information notifying means for notifying discrimination information.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A7 to A11, the following effects are produced. In other words, by executing the second pre-determination for the entrance information stored in the storage means, the second pre-determination information can be notified until the determination condition for the entrance information is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance whether the award game to be executed soon is an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player, and it is possible to diversify the effects to be executed.

  In the gaming machine A12, the game machine A12 includes continuous effect execution means capable of executing a continuous effect accompanying continuous dynamic display for any entry information stored in the storage means, and the continuous effect execution means includes: An amusement machine A13 that performs an effect reflecting the second prior discrimination information.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A12, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that reflects the second prior discrimination information for continuous dynamic display. As a result, not only whether there is information corresponding to the bonus game in the pitch information stored in the storage means, but whether there is ball entry information corresponding to the advantageous bonus game advantageous to the player. This determination result can be notified in a continuous display accompanying a plurality of dynamic displays, and the effects to be executed can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine A13, a privilege game effect setting means for setting a privilege game effect accompanying execution of the privilege game, a privilege game effect execution means for executing the privilege game effect set by the privilege game effect setting means, When the bonus game effect is set by the bonus game effect setting means, there is a continuous effect determining means for determining whether the continuous effect is being performed, and the privilege game effect setting means is in the continuous effect. A game A14 characterized in that when it is determined by the determination means that the continuous production is being performed, a specific privilege game production is set.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A13, the following effects are achieved. That is, even if a special game is executed during a period in which the continuous production is executed, it is possible to execute a specific special game production for the continuous production as the special game production. Therefore, there is an effect that a continuous performance can be provided to the player without a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine A14, the privilege game effect setting means sets, as the specific privilege game effect, a continuation suggestion effect that suggests that a continuous effect is continued in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantaged privilege game. A gaming machine A15 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A14, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a bonus game corresponding to a disadvantaged bonus game is executed during a period in which the continuous effect is executed, an effect suggesting that the continuous effect is continued is executed. Therefore, if a bonus game is won multiple times during a continuous performance, even if a bonus game corresponding to an unfavorable bonus game is executed, the continuous suggestion will be executed, so that the bonus will be given multiple times to the player. It can be made difficult to recognize that the game has been executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation due to the execution of the privilege game a plurality of times.

  In the gaming machine A14 or A15, the award game effect setting means suggests that, in the case of the award game corresponding to the advantageous award game as the specific award game effect, the current award game is an advantageous award game. A gaming machine A16 characterized in that a suggestion effect to be set is set.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A14 or A15, the following effects are produced. That is, when a bonus game corresponding to an advantageous bonus game is executed while a continuous performance is being executed, a suggestion effect that suggests that the current bonus game is an advantageous bonus game is executed. Therefore, when a bonus game is won a plurality of times during a continuous performance, if a bonus game corresponding to an advantageous bonus game is executed, a suggestion effect is executed, which provides an advantageous state for the player. Can be recognized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation due to the execution of the privilege game a plurality of times.

  Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine A15, when a bonus game is won a plurality of times during a continuous performance, if a disadvantaged bonus game is executed, a continuation suggesting effect is executed, and an advantageous bonus game is executed. The suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, even if the bonus game is executed a plurality of times during the continuous performance, the continuous performance is performed until the bonus game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed. It can be executed as a continuous production. Therefore, when a privilege game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

<Feature B group> (There is a period in which a plurality of small hits are advantageously executed)
A discriminating unit for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition; a display unit for displaying identification information based on a discrimination result by the discriminating unit; A dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the means, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means A game execution means, and a variable entry means capable of changing from a closed state in which a ball is difficult to enter to an open state in which the ball can enter, when the privilege game is executed by the bonus game execution means, In the gaming machine having a specific area provided in the variable pitching means, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passage of the ball through the specific area, the specific area Heball passes A variable means capable of alternately changing a possible advantageous state and a disadvantageous state in which passage of a ball is more difficult than the advantageous state; and the variable means is in either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state. The variable control means for variably controlling the variable means with the period from the change to the next state being changed to the one state as one operation period, and the one time Game machine B1, comprising: a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the bonus game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within the operation period of

  Here, the gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened by a bonus game (such as a small hitting game) and a specific area that is provided in the variable winning device and that a jackpot game is executed by passing a ball And a guide member that guides the sphere to the specific area, a mode in which the sphere easily passes through the specific area through the guide member, and a mode in which the sphere hardly passes through the specific area is controlled to be repeatedly executed at a constant cycle. A pachinko machine has been proposed that randomizes the occurrence of jackpot games in a specific jackpot game by providing means and making the opening operation of the variable winning device based on the jackpot game independent of the control operation of the guide member (For example, JP, 2011-206309, A). In this case, since the timing at which the variable winning device is released by the small hit game and the timing at which the mode of the guide member changes are independent and independent, the specific area can be determined no matter how many times the small hit game is repeated. There is a problem that the player may not be able to pass through and the player's willingness to play may be reduced. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in player's willingness to play.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the privilege game is played so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period in which the variable means is variably controlled between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state. Can be executed multiple times. Therefore, when the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period, it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed in a period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when a privilege game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  In the gaming machine B1, a ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a ball entry information obtaining means for obtaining ball entry information based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and a ball entry information obtaining means And a storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of entry information acquired by the above until at least the determination condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, by storing a plurality of pieces of entry information by the storage means, a plurality of dynamic displays can be executed sequentially. Therefore, since the situation where the dynamic display is interrupted within one operation period can be suppressed, there is an effect that the possibility of executing the privilege game a plurality of times can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined condition is established when the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the discrimination result by the discrimination means has a discrimination result for setting a specific gaming state in addition to the discrimination result for executing the bonus game. There is an effect that various games can be provided to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the predetermined condition is established when a predetermined number or more of the entry information is stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific gaming state is set when the number of pieces of ball entry information stored in the storage means is stored in a predetermined number or more. Accordingly, it is possible to cause the player to eagerly play a game so as to always store a predetermined number or more of balls in the storage means, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B4, the specific gaming state setting means includes dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in which identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display The period setting means includes special dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a special dynamic display period which is a dynamic display period shorter than normal when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Game machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special dynamic display period setting means sets a special dynamic display period which is a dynamic display period shorter than usual. Thereby, a plurality of dynamic displays can be executed within one operation period. Therefore, since the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period, the variable means can be in an advantageous state by winning the privilege game a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a privilege game that allows the ball to reach the variable means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the bonus game is won multiple times.

  In the configuration provided with the gaming machine B2, a plurality of entry information can be stored in the storage means, so that when the special dynamic display period is set, a situation where the dynamic display is interrupted occurs. There is an effect that this can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B5, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least before the special dynamic display period is set, a ball entry assisting state in which the ball entry information is easily stored in the storage means A gaming machine B6 having auxiliary state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, before the special dynamic display period is set, it is possible to set the entry assisting state in which entry information is easily stored in the storage means. Therefore, the special dynamic display period can be easily set in a state where a plurality of pieces of entry information are stored in the storage means, so that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the specific gaming state is interrupted in the middle.

  The entry assisting state setting means, for example, sets a state in which entry information is easily stored in the storage means by setting a long dynamic display time, or restricts entry of a ball into the entry means. It is conceivable that the restricting means is variable so as not to restrict the entrance of the ball.

  In the gaming machine B6, the entry assisting state setting means sets a predetermined dynamic display period as a dynamic display period in which the dynamic display is performed.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B6, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to store the entry information in the storage means only by using a configuration in which a predetermined dynamic display period is set. There is an effect that it is possible to easily suppress a situation where the specific gaming state is interrupted in the middle.

  As the predetermined dynamic display period, it is only necessary to set a period during which a plurality of spheres can enter the ball entry means. For example, a dynamic display period of about 30 seconds may be set. . In addition, if a dynamic display period is intentionally set for the purpose of causing a plurality of balls to enter the ball entry means, the dynamic display period is longer than usual.

  Furthermore, the target for which the predetermined dynamic display period is set includes the dynamic display of the identification information in which the determination result of the determination means becomes the predetermined determination result, and the first execution performed after the specific gaming state is set. Possible indications.

  Here, the following configuration may be used as means for producing the same effect as the gaming machine B7. That is, in a specific gaming state, a predetermined dynamic display period may be set when it is determined that the stored pitch information is less than or equal to a predetermined number. In this case, the predetermined number is preferably at least one. This is to make the determination by the determination means at least a plurality of times in the remaining specific gaming state to be executed after the predetermined dynamic display period is set. As a result, the bonus information stored in the storage means during the specific gaming state is less than or equal to the predetermined number, and the bonus game is executed a plurality of times during the specific gaming state even after the predetermined dynamic display period is set. Is possible.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the specific gaming state setting means includes variable control period extending means for extending the one operation period variably controlled by the variable control means. A gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the specific gaming state is set, one operation period in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control period extending means is extended. Therefore, since the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable device a plurality of times within one operation period of the variable control device, the variable device is in an advantageous state by winning the privilege game a plurality of times. It is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed so that the ball reaches the variable means within the period. Therefore, when a privilege game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  In the gaming machine B8, the variable control period extending means extends the first period of the one operation period, the gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B8, in order to extend the first period of one operation period of the variable control means, the ball is moved to the variable means within the period when the variable means is in an advantageous state. It is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed so as to arrive. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the bonus game is won multiple times.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the specific gaming state setting means has a bonus game period shortening means for shortening a period during which the bonus game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the period during which the bonus game is executed can be shortened, so that the variable means can be changed within one operation period. The privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the bonus game is won multiple times.

  In the gaming machine B10, the gaming machine B11 is characterized in that the bonus game period shortening means shortens a period in which the variable pitching means is in a closed state in a period during which the bonus game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B10, it is possible to shorten the period during which the variable pitching means is in the closed state during the period in which the bonus game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the bonus game is executed so that the ball reaches the variable means within the period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state, and if the bonus game is won multiple times, the player's game There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the specific gaming state setting means sets the specific gaming state until the determination by the determining means is executed a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific gaming state can be set until the determination by the determination means is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, since a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided within a limited range, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a period during which the player has a sense of expectation.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B12, when the determination result by the determination unit is the specific determination result, at least before the bonus game based on the specific determination result is executed. An advantageous bonus game discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the game is an advantageous bonus game through which a ball can pass through a specific area, and an information notifying means for informing information based on a discrimination result of the advantageous bonus game discriminating means. Characteristic gaming machine B13.

  According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B12, the following effects are produced. That is, before the bonus game is executed by the information notification means, information based on the determination result of whether or not the bonus game executed this time is a bonus game advantageous to the player is notified. Therefore, even if the bonus game is continuously won, the content of the information to be notified can be made different. Therefore, when the bonus game is won multiple times, the player's willingness to play is reduced. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B13, a pre-determination unit that discriminates the entrance information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied, and a pre-determination information determined by the pre-determination unit include: When it is determined that the information indicates a bonus game, the bonus game is an advantageous bonus game in which a ball can pass through a specific area, or a disadvantageous bonus game in which a ball cannot pass through the specific area more than the advantageous bonus game. Second pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not, and the second pre-determination means determines the entry information pre-determined by the second pre-determination means until the determination means discriminates. And a second prior discrimination information notifying means for informing the second prior discrimination information.

  According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B13, the following effects are produced. That is, by executing the second pre-determination for the entry information stored in the storage means, the second pre-determination information is notified during the period until the entry information is determined by the determination means. can do. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance whether the award game to be executed soon is an advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player, and it is possible to diversify the effects to be executed.

  In the gaming machine B14, the game machine B14 has continuous effect execution means capable of executing a continuous effect accompanying continuous dynamic display for any entry information stored in the storage means, and the continuous effect execution means includes: A gaming machine B15 that performs an effect based on the second prior discrimination information.

  According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B14, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that reflects the second prior discrimination information for continuous dynamic display. As a result, not only whether there is information corresponding to the bonus game in the pitch information stored in the storage means, but whether there is ball entry information corresponding to the advantageous bonus game advantageous to the player. This determination result can be notified in a continuous display accompanying a plurality of dynamic displays, and the effects to be executed can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine B15, a privilege game effect setting means for setting a privilege game effect accompanying the execution of the privilege game, a privilege game effect execution means for executing the privilege game effect set by the privilege game effect setting means, When the bonus game effect is set by the bonus game effect setting means, there is a continuous effect determining means for determining whether the continuous effect is being performed, and the privilege game effect setting means is in the continuous effect. A game B16 characterized by setting a specific bonus game effect when it is determined by the determining means that the continuous effect is being performed.

  According to the gaming machine B16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B15, the following effects are produced. That is, even if a special game is executed during a period in which the continuous production is executed, it is possible to execute the special game production for the continuous production as the special game production. Therefore, there is an effect that a continuous performance can be provided to the player without a sense of incongruity.

  In the gaming machine B16, the privilege game effect setting means sets, as the specific privilege game effect, a continuation suggesting effect that suggests that a continuous effect is continued in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantaged privilege game. A gaming machine B17 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B15, the following effects are produced. In other words, when a privilege game corresponding to a disadvantaged privilege game is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, an effect suggesting that the continuous effect is continued is executed. Therefore, if a bonus game is won multiple times during a continuous performance, even if a bonus game corresponding to an unfavorable bonus game is executed, the continuous suggestion will be executed, so that the bonus will be given multiple times to the player. It can be made difficult to recognize that the game has been executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  In the gaming machine B16 or B17, the privilege game effect setting means suggests that the bonus game of this time is an advantageous privilege game in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game as the specific privilege game effect. A gaming machine B18 characterized in that a suggestion effect to be set is set.

  According to the gaming machine B18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B16 or B17, the following effects are produced. That is, when a bonus game corresponding to an advantageous bonus game is executed while a continuous performance is being executed, a suggestion effect that suggests that the current bonus game is an advantageous bonus game is executed. Therefore, when a bonus game is won a plurality of times during a continuous performance, if a bonus game corresponding to an advantageous bonus game is executed, a suggestion effect is executed, which provides an advantageous state for the player. Can be recognized. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine B17, in the case where a bonus game is won a plurality of times during a continuous performance, if a disadvantaged bonus game is executed, a continuation suggesting effect is executed, and an advantageous bonus game is executed. The suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, even if the bonus game is executed a plurality of times during the continuous performance, the continuous performance is performed until the bonus game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed. It can be executed as a continuous production. Therefore, when a privilege game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

<Feature C group> (There is a period during which a plurality of small hits are easily executed)
Based on the entrance means that can enter the ball, the entrance information acquisition means that acquires the entrance information based on the entrance of the entrance ball into the entrance means, and determination based on the establishment of the determination condition A discriminating unit, a display unit for displaying identification information based on a discrimination result by the discriminating unit, and a dynamic display of the identification information on the display unit for a predetermined period, and then the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discriminating unit is stopped and displayed. And a dynamic display means for causing the player to be advantageous when the identification information based on the specific discrimination result determined by the discrimination means as the specific entrance information is stopped and displayed on the display means. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game, a specific area in which a ball can pass when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means, and a ball in the specific area Passed through And a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player, a specification for setting a specific game state that facilitates acquisition of the specific entry information based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied The predetermined condition is satisfied when the bonus game is executed a plurality of times in a state where a special condition that can be satisfied in the game state setting means and the specific game state set by the specific game state setting means is satisfied. In the meantime, the gaming machine C1 has setting means for setting so that at least one of the bonus games executed a plurality of times is executed.

  Here, the gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a variable winning device that is opened by a bonus game (such as a small hitting game) and a specific area that is provided in the variable winning device and that a jackpot game is executed by passing a ball By providing a guide member that guides the sphere to the specific region, a control unit that controls the guide member to a mode in which the sphere easily passes through the specific region, and a mode in which the sphere does not easily pass through the specific region. A pachinko machine that can provide a big hit game when a specific area is passed after winning a win game has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206309). In this case, in order to provide the jackpot game with a predetermined probability, it is necessary to execute the jackpot game with a probability equal to or higher than the predetermined probability. There was a problem that the player had a feeling of pleasure and the player's willingness to play decreased. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in player's willingness to play.

  According to the gaming machine C1, since it has a specific game state where it is easy to acquire specific entry information, it is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of special games in a normal state other than the specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  In addition, the special game state is a state in which a privilege game is likely to occur frequently, but if a special game is executed a plurality of times during the specific game state, a game state in which a ball can easily pass through the specific region can be achieved. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be suppressed that the player's gaming motivation is reduced due to frequent occurrence of the privilege game.

  In the gaming machine C1, the specific condition is established when the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result other than the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, in addition to the discrimination result for executing the bonus game as the discrimination result by the discrimination means, there is a discrimination result for setting the specific gaming state. There is an effect that various games can be provided to the player based on the discrimination result.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the game machine C1 or C2 includes storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied, and the special condition is the storage means A gaming machine C3, which is established by storing a predetermined number or more of entry information.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the special condition is established by storing a predetermined number or more of the entry information in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to store a large amount of entry information in the storage means in order to establish a special condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine C1 or C2 includes storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied, and the special condition is stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C4, which is established when the bonus game is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of stored entry information.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, a special condition is established when a plurality of special games are executed in a predetermined order corresponding to each of the plurality of pieces of entry information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to store a large amount of entry information in the storage means in order to establish a special condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C4, the predetermined order is a gaming machine C5 in which the bonus game is continuously executed a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, when a privilege game is continuously executed, when a plurality of privilege games are executed in a predetermined order, at least one of the privilege games executed a plurality of times is a specific region. It is set to be executed in a state where the sphere can pass through. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to store a large amount of entry information in the storage means so that the bonus game is continuously executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the ball entry means is provided on the basis of the first ball entry means in which the ball can enter and the first ball entry means provided separately from the opening condition. Has a second entrance means capable of entering the ball, and the entrance of the ball into the second entrance means is more than the first entrance information acquired based on the entrance into the first entrance means. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the second entry information acquired based on the ball is set so that the specific entry information is higher.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the following effects are produced. That is, as the ball entry means, a first ball entry means capable of entering a ball and a second ball entry which is provided separately from the first ball entry means and allows the ball to enter based on the establishment of an opening condition. A ball means is provided, of which the second entry information acquired based on the entry to the second entry means is more than the first entry information obtained based on the entry to the first entry means. Specific entry information is set high. Thus, there is an effect that the frequency of executing the privilege game can be lowered until the release condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine C6, second determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition, second display means for displaying identification information based on the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display After the identification information is dynamically displayed on the means for a predetermined period, the second dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the second discrimination means, and the dynamic display by the second dynamic display means Second dynamic display period setting means for setting a second dynamic display period of identification information, and identification information based on a specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means by the second dynamic display means. And a second privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game that establishes an opening condition for the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means is the predetermined determination result. In the second dynamic display period setting And a second special dynamic display period setting means for setting a second special dynamic display period which is a second dynamic display period shorter than usual as the second dynamic display period set by the means. Game machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination result by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, and the identification information based on the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means by the second dynamic display means, When the second bonus game execution means establishes the condition for releasing the second entry means, and the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, it is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. A second dynamic display period shorter than normal is set as the second dynamic display period. Thereby, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, it is possible to provide a gaming state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance means.

  Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine C5, since the second entry means is more likely to acquire specific entry information than the first entry means, the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a predetermined discrimination result. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming state in which a plurality of specific entry information can be easily obtained, that is, a plurality of special games can be easily executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the storage means includes a first storage unit capable of storing a plurality of the first entry information and a second storage unit capable of storing a plurality of the second entry information. And a second special condition as the special condition, wherein the second special condition stores a predetermined number of pieces of entry information larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in the first storage unit. A gaming machine C8 characterized by being able to be established.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the number of pieces of entry information stored in the storage means is larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in the first storage unit, that is, when at least the entry information is stored in the second storage unit, the special condition Is established. Thereby, in a game state where a privilege game is easy to be executed, if a privilege game is executed a plurality of times, a state advantageous to the player can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to store a large amount of entry information in the storage means in order to establish a special condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine C8, the second special condition is that the storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of entry information larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in the first storage unit, and the specific entry information is stored in a predetermined number. A gaming machine C9, which is established when stored as described above.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, the following effects are produced. That is, the second special condition is satisfied when the storage means stores a predetermined number of pieces of entry information that is larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in the first storage unit and stores a predetermined number of pieces of entry information. To do. Therefore, the conditions for satisfying the second special condition can be complicated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, there is provided variable entry means for changing from a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter to an open state in which the ball can enter based on the execution of the privilege game. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the specific area is provided in the variable pitching means.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the following effects are produced. That is, since the specific area is provided in the variable pitching means that changes to the open state based on the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute the game aiming at the specific area only when the special game is executed. It becomes. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with game value for the bonus game, and therefore, when the bonus game is won a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation. .

  In the gaming machine C10, a variable means that is provided in the variable entry means and can be changed between an advantageous state in which a ball can easily pass through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball cannot easily pass through the specific area, and the variable Variable control means for changing the means alternately between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the variable means is changed to the advantageous state by the variable control means. A gaming machine C11 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable control means is configured so that the variable means can be variably controlled in an advantageous state in which the sphere can easily pass through the specific area and in an unfavorable state in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area. A predetermined condition that allows passage is established. As a result, when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the ball that has entered the variable entry means after the bonus game is executed can pass through the specific area, thereby increasing the difficulty of the ball passing through the specific area. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine C11, the variable control means variably controls the variable means so that the variable state is repeatedly changed between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the following effects are produced. That is, since the variable means is repeatedly varied between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle by the variable control means, the timing at which the variable means becomes advantageous is made random with respect to the timing at which the bonus game is executed. Is possible. Therefore, there is a possibility that a ball that has entered the variable ball entry means at various timings may pass through the specific area, so that there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines C10 to C12, the variable control means sets the variable period as a single operation period with a third period that is a combination of the first period in the advantageous state and the second period in the disadvantageous state. Means for variably controlling, the setting means includes a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to the bonus game, the dynamic display period setting means, When the award game is executed a plurality of times, the one award game and any one of the other award games are executed at different timings with respect to the one operation period. A gaming machine C13 comprising special dynamic display period setting means for setting a special dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a game.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C10 to C12, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable control means variably controls the variable means with the third period, which is the first period that is in the advantageous state and the second period that is in the disadvantaged state, as one operation period, and the dynamic display period that the setting means has The dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the bonus game is set by the setting means. Then, when the special game is executed a plurality of times by the special dynamic display period setting unit included in the dynamic display period setting unit, one special game and another A special dynamic display period is set so that any one of the bonus games is executed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to set the privilege game which can pass a specific area | region, and the privilege game which cannot pass a specific area | region by changing a dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the game as compared with the case where the privilege game that can pass through the specific region and the privilege game that is difficult to pass through the specific region are set.

  Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine C5, the first award game (the first award game (corresponding to any other award game)) among the award games continuously executed is included. On the other hand, the special dynamic display period is set so that the execution timing of the privilege game to be executed next (second privilege game (corresponding to one privilege game)) is different. That is, by setting the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the second bonus game as the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of the bonus game that is continuously executed is set to one operation period of the variable means. Can be different. As a result, the target for setting the special dynamic display period is only the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the bonus game, so that the program capacity for executing the game process can be reduced.

  Note that in a configuration that does not include the gaming machine C5, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display corresponding to the detachment) that is executed while a plurality of privilege games are executed is also the special dynamic display. Configured to set a period. This increases the number of patterns that provide an advantageous state to the player when the bonus game is executed a plurality of times, compared to the configuration in which the dynamic display that is the target for setting the special dynamic display period includes the gaming machine C5. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine C13, the special dynamic display period setting means, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of the first privilege game relative to the execution timing of any one of the other privilege games. The special dynamic display period is set so as to be different for a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C13, the following effects are produced. That is, if the special dynamic display period is set, the execution timing of one bonus game is different from the execution timing of any other bonus game by a predetermined period of time equal to or less than the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. It becomes possible to make it. Thereby, when the execution timing of one privilege game and any other privilege game is made different, the execution timing of each privilege game is set across the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. Can be prevented. Therefore, since it becomes easy to provide a state advantageous to the player by winning the privilege game a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the privilege game is won a plurality of times. effective.

  Furthermore, it is desirable that the predetermined period equal to or less than the first period is different from the first period. By doing so, it is possible to execute a plurality of privileged games at a wide range of timings without crossing the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state, thereby providing a gaming state advantageous to the player. It is possible to increase the probability of being played. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the bonus game is won multiple times.

  When the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of the one privilege game is different from the execution timing of any one of the other privilege games by at least a predetermined period of the first period or more. As described above, the special dynamic display period may be settable. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to vary greatly the execution timing of the privilege game performed several times.

  In the gaming machine C14, the special dynamic display period setting means is configured to be able to set the special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times, and when the special dynamic display period is set to the predetermined number of times, The predetermined number of times is set such that, among the execution timings of the privilege game that is executed a plurality of times, the interval of execution timing of the privilege game that is farthest from the one operation period is wider than the second period. A gaming machine C15, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C14, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to set a special dynamic display period up to a predetermined number of times for each of the award games that are executed a plurality of times, and among the execution timings of the award games that are executed a plurality of times, the most distant interval is variable. The predetermined number of times for which the special dynamic display period is set is set so as to be wider than the second period in which the means is disadvantageous. Thereby, when the special dynamic display period is set a predetermined number of times, the special game can be executed at a timing other than the second period in any special game in which the special dynamic display period is set. That is, it is possible to reliably provide an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when the bonus game is won multiple times.

<Characteristic D group> (Structure that makes it easy to win V in consecutive wins)
Based on the establishment of the specific condition, a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, and a pitching means capable of entering when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. And a variable means that can be varied between an allowable position for allowing the ball to enter the ball entry means and a restricting position for restricting the entry of the ball, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine having a specific area in which a ball can pass through and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player based on the passage of the ball through the specific region, a plurality of the bonus games are provided. When the game is executed once, a ball whose entry into the entry means is restricted by the variable means located at the restriction position during the award game is transferred to the entry means during the award game thereafter. Guiding means capable of guiding Gaming machine D1, characterized in that it comprises setting means for setting such conditions at least benefits game of the next subsequent award game during which is satisfied is executed, the.

  Here, in the game machine such as a pachinko machine, in the small hit game that opens the winning opening, the first small hit game that opens and closes the variable ball entry means in a mode in which the ball easily enters, and the mode in which the ball is difficult to win A gaming machine having a second small hit game that opens and closes a variable pitching means is proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233195). In such a gaming machine, it is difficult to make the ball enter the winning opening even if the second small hit game is won, and when the second small hit game is won continuously, Since there is no advantage, there is a problem that when a plurality of second small hit games are won, the player's willingness to play is reduced. The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in player's willingness to play.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when a privilege game is executed a plurality of times, a ball whose entry into the entry means is restricted during the benefit game is guided to the entry means during the following award game. It has a possible configuration. Moreover, it has the structure which sets so that at least 1 privilege game among the privilege games after the next may be performed in the state which a ball can pass to a specific area | region. Therefore, when the bonus game is won a plurality of times, the player is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when the bonus game is won a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation. .

  In the gaming machine D1, the guiding means includes a downflow passage through which a ball can flow down, and a downflow period extending means for extending a period of time during which the ball flows down through the downflow passage. D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, by extending the period during which the ball flows down the downflow passage by the downflow period extending means, the ball flowing down the downflow passage is allowed to flow down to a position where the ball can enter the incoming means during the next bonus game. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely guide to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent bonus games.

  In the gaming machine D2, discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition, display means for displaying identification information based on a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and dynamic display of the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period Then, the dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means And the specific condition is established when identification information based on a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means, and the flow period extending means is It is characterized in that the flow path is extended so that the period during which the ball flows down is longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one of the following bonus games. Game machine D3 to.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the period during which the ball flows down the flow path is set to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one award game among the following award games. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely guide to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent bonus games.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the ball entry means has a first opening into which a ball can enter and a second opening provided separately from the first opening, and the guiding means The game machine D4 is characterized in that it guides a ball whose entry into the first opening is restricted by the variable means located at the restriction position to the second opening.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, the ball entry means has a first opening and a second opening, and a ball restricted to enter the first opening is guided to the second opening by the guide means. By comprising in this way, there exists an effect that it can guide | invite to the said entrance means more reliably during the said privilege game after the next.

  In the gaming machine D4, the variable means has a covering member that covers the first opening and the second opening when the variable means is located at the restriction position, and a ball can roll on the upper surface of the covering member. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the second opening has a wider area covered by the covering member than the first opening.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable means has a covering member capable of covering the first opening and the second opening, and the region where the second opening is covered by the covering member is made wider than the first opening. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to enter the second opening than the first opening, and when the bonus game is won a plurality of times, it can be in a state advantageous to the player. In the case where the bonus game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the ball entry means is a second guide means that makes it easier for a ball that has entered from the second opening to enter the specific area than a ball that has entered from the first opening. A gaming machine D6 characterized by having the following.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are produced. That is, the sphere that has entered from the second opening is configured to flow into the specific area more easily than the sphere that has entered from the first opening by flowing down the second guiding means. As a result, when a bonus game is won multiple times, it can be in an advantageous state for the player, and when a bonus game is won multiple times, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation. effective.

  In the gaming machine D6, second variable means provided in the ball entry means and capable of being changed to an allowable position that allows passage of the ball to the specific area or a restriction position that restricts passage of the ball to the specific area; The second variable means includes second variable control means for changing the second variable means to the permissible position for a predetermined period after the bonus game is executed, and the second guide means is provided through the first opening. A second passage that is a passage until a ball that has entered from the second opening passes through the specific region, rather than a passage period of the first passage that is a passage until the ball that has entered passes through the specific region. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the passage period of the game machine is configured to be short.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are produced. That is, a second variable means that can be changed to an allowable position that allows passage of the sphere to the specific area or a restriction position that restricts passage of the sphere to the specific area is provided in the ball entry means, and the second variable control means The second variable means is changed to an allowable position for a predetermined period after the bonus game is executed. And as a 2nd guidance means, the ball | bowl entered from the 1st opening part is a passage until the ball | bowl passed through the said specific area, and the ball | bowl entered from the 2nd opening part until it passes a specific area | region. A second passage which is a passage is provided, and the passage period in which the sphere passes through the second passage is shorter than the passage period in which the sphere passes through the first passage. Thereby, the sphere entered from the second opening can pass through the specific area more easily than the sphere entered from the first opening. Therefore, when the bonus game is won multiple times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the bonus game is won multiple times, the player's willingness to play can be suppressed from being reduced. There is.

  The period during which the variable means is allowed by the second variable control means is set to be longer than the passage period in which the sphere passes through the first passage and shorter than the passage period in which the sphere passes through the second passage. Also good. By doing in this way, it can restrict | limit that the ball | bowl which passes passages other than a 2nd passage | pass passes a specific area | region. Therefore, when the bonus game is won multiple times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the bonus game is won multiple times, the player's willingness to play can be suppressed from being reduced. There is.

  In the gaming machine D7, the second passage is formed so that the downward slope is steeper than the first passage.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second passage formed with a steeper slope than the first passage, the speed at which the spheres flow down can be increased as compared with the first passage.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the ball that won the second opening than the first opening can provide a more advantageous state for the player.

  In the gaming machine D7 or D8, the gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the second passage is formed at a shorter distance than the first passage.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7 or D8, the following effects are produced. That is, the second passage can be set at a shorter distance than the first passage.

  Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to surely provide a state in which the ball won in the second opening is more advantageous to the player than the first opening.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, a ball is configured to be able to enter, and includes a entrance device having the entrance means, the variable means, and the guide means. A third guiding means capable of guiding the ball into the entrance means; a discharge port capable of discharging the ball guided by the third guiding means to the outside of the entrance device; and And a third variable means that can be varied between a permissible position that allows passage and a restriction position that restricts passage of the ball to the discharge port, and the third variable means is configured to execute the bonus game. Based on the above, the gaming machine D10 is characterized in that the third variable means is changed to the restricted position.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the following effects are produced. That is, a third guiding means is provided for guiding a ball that has entered a ball entry device having a ball entry means, a variable means, and a guidance means to the ball entry means. The third guiding means is provided with a discharge port through which the ball can be discharged to the outside of the pitching device, and the third variable means is varied to discharge the ball guided by the third guiding means to the outside of the pitching device. Or switching to the ball entry means. And a 3rd variable means is varied so that the ball guided by the 3rd guidance means may be guided to the entrance means when a privilege game is performed. By comprising in this way, it can prevent that a ball | bowl is guide | induced to a ball entry means until a privilege game is performed. Therefore, when a privilege game is executed independently, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball from entering from the second opening.

  In the gaming machine D10, the third variable means is variable in conjunction with the variable operation of the first variable means.

  According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D10, the third variable means is variable in conjunction with the variable operation of the first variable means, so that the drive source for changing the variable means can be reduced. There is an effect that can be done. Further, the variable operation of the third variable means is linked to the first variable means that is variably controlled by executing the bonus game, so that there is an effect that the variable operation along the bonus game can be performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D11, the downflow period extending means includes downflow distance extending means for extending the downflow period by extending the downflow distance of the downflow passage. .

  According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D2 to D11, the flow down period extending means extends the flow down distance of the flow down passage by the flow down distance extending means. There is an effect that it is possible to guide to the entry means during the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine D12, the downflow distance extending means is a meandering downflow passage in which the downflow passage is formed in a meandering shape.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D12, since the meandering flow path is used to extend the flow distance, the space for installing the flow path can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D13, the flow period extension means includes flow speed reduction means for reducing the speed of a sphere flowing down the flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D2 to D13, the flow period extension means reduces the speed of the sphere flowing down the flow path by the flow speed reduction means, so that the more reliable There is an effect that it is possible to guide to the entry means during the bonus game after the next.

  In the gaming machine D14, the downflow speed reducing means is a speed reducing member that reduces the downflow speed of the ball.

  According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D14, since the speed reducing member is used to reduce the flow down speed, there is an effect that the space for installing the flow down path can be reduced.

  In addition, as a speed reduction member, the member which can reduce the falling speed of a ball | bowl by the friction which arises between objects can be considered. For example, it is preferable to use a member (urethane rubber or the like) that exhibits a high coefficient of friction that reduces the falling speed of the sphere by the frictional force generated when the sphere rolls. Further, if a material having a higher rolling friction than the material used for the other flow path is used, that material becomes the speed reducing member. For example, if the upper surface of the flow path of other spheres is coated with a fluorine-based resin (PTFE or the like), it may be formed of a synthetic resin such as an ABS resin having a higher rolling friction than the upper surface of the flow path. Moreover, the case where the ball rolling surface of the flow-down passage is roughened or a protrusion is provided to increase the frictional force between the objects and reduce the flow-down speed of the ball is also included.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
650 Second variable winning device (variable pitching means)
650d V gate (variable means)
650e5 passage detection switch (specific area)
S111 Variable control means S220 Bonus game execution means S407 Discrimination means S409 Setting means, entry assisting state setting means S1306 Part of privilege giving means S1309 Part of privilege giving means S1707 Dynamic display means S2152 Specific game state setting means

Claims (5)

Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition;
Display means for displaying identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period, and then stopping and displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means;
When the identification information based on the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player;
When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, variable entry means that can change from a closed state where the ball is difficult to enter to an open state where the ball can enter,
A specific area provided in the variable pitching means;
In a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passage of the ball through the specific area,
Variable means capable of alternately changing an advantageous state in which a sphere can pass to the specific region and a disadvantageous state in which it is more difficult to pass the sphere than the advantageous state;
The variable means is variable by setting a period from when the variable means is changed to one of the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state to the next state to be changed to the one state. Variable control means for controlling;
Specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within the one operation period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. And a gaming machine characterized by comprising: A ball entry means that allows a ball to enter,
Based on the fact that a ball has entered the entrance means, entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when a determination result by the determination unit is a predetermined determination result other than the specific determination result. The specific game state setting means includes dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in which identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means,
The dynamic display period setting means includes special dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a special dynamic display period that is a dynamic display period shorter than normal when the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.   When the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least before the special dynamic display period is set, the entry assist state setting means for setting the entry assist state in which the entry information is easily stored in the storage means. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine is a machine.

Images